670163

Icom IC-7300 Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/173
Pagina verder
FULL MANUAL
i7300
INDEX
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
14 MAINTENANCE
13 OTHER FUNCTIONS
12 SET MODE
11 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
10 SCANS
9 MEMORY OPERATION
8 USING AN SD CARD
7 VOICE TX MEMORY OPERATION
6 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
5 SCOPE OPERATION
4 RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
3 BASIC OPERATION
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
16 SPECIFICATIONS
17 OPTIONS
18 CONNECTOR INFORMATION
19 CONTROL COMMAND
ABOUT CE
INTRODUCTION
HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER
i
Thank you for choosing this Icom product. The IC-7300 HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER is designed and built with Icom’s
state of the art technology and craftsmanship. With proper care, this product should provide you with years of
trouble-free operation. We appreciate you making the IC-7300 your transceiver of choice, and hope you agree
with Icom’s philosophy of “technology rst.” Many hours of research and development went into the design of
your IC-7300.
FEATURES
• RF Direct Sampling System
The IC-7300 employs an RF direct sampling system.
RF signals are directly converted to digital data and
processed in the FPGA. This system is a leading
technology marking an epoch in amateur radio.
• Real-Time Spectrum Scope
The spectrum scope is class-leading in resolution,
sweep speed and dynamic range. When you touch the
scope screen on the intended signal, the touched area is
magnied. The large 4.3 inch color TFT touch LCD offers
intuitive operation.
• New “IP+” Function
The new IP Plus function improves 3rd order intercept
point (IP3) performance. When a weak signal is received
adjacent to strong interference, the AD converter is
optimized against signal distortion.
• Class Leading RMDR and Phase Noise
Characteristics
The RMDR is improved to about 97dB (typical value) and
Phase Noise characteristics are also improved about
15dB (at 1 kHz frequency separation) compared to the
IC-7200.
• A 4.3 inch touch screen color display
• A built-in automatic antenna tuner
• Multi-function control for easy settings
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
L Different types of accessories may be supplied, or may
not be supplied depending on the transceiver version.
WORD DEFINITION
R DANGER!
Personal death, serious injury or an
explosion may occur.
R WARNING!
Personal injury, fire hazard or electric
shock may occur.
CAUTION
Equipment damage may occur.
NOTE
Recommended for optimum use. No
risk of personal injury, fire or electric
shock.
EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS
IMPORTANT
READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS carefully completely
before using the transceiver.
SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL— This
instruction manual contains full operating instructions
for the IC-7300
.
Hand microphone
(HM-219)
DC power cable*
(3 m: 9.8 ft)
Spare fuse
(25 A)
Spare fuse
(30 A)
Spare fuse
(5 A)
CD
Speaker plug
(3.5 mm: 1/8" Stereo)
CW key plug
(6.35 mm: 1/4" Stereo)
ACC plug
(13 pin)
This product includes RTOS “RTX” software, and is
licensed according to the software license.
This product includes “zlib” open source software,
and is licensed according to the open source
software license.
This product includes “libpng” open source software,
and is licensed according to the open source
software license.
Refer to the Text les in the License folder of
included CD for information on the open source
software being used by this product.
*For European versions
ii
• FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
DISPOSAL
The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in
the European Union, all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators
(rechargeable batteries) must be taken to designated collection locations at the end of their work-
ing life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste.
Dispose of them according to the laws in your area.
FCC INFORMATION
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE
TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE
SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC
RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.
CAUTION: Changes or modications to this device,
not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void
your authority to operate this device under FCC
regulations.
Icom is not responsible for the destruction or damage to the Icom transceiver, if the malfunction is because of:
• Force majeure, including, but not limited to, res, earthquakes, storms, oods, lightnings, or other natural
disasters, disturbances, riots, war, or radioactive contamination.
• The use of Icom transceiver with any equipment that is not manufactured or approved by Icom.
TRADEMARKS
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the
United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia, Australia, New Zealand and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
iii
ABOUT THE TOUCH SCREEN
D Touch operation
In the Full manual or Basic manual, the touch
operation is described as shown below.
Touch
If the display is touched briey, one short beep
sounds.
Touch for 1 second
If the display is touched for 1 second, one
short and one long beep sound.
D Touch screen precautions
• The touch screen may not properly work when the
LCD protection lm or sheet is attached.
• Touching the screen with your nger nails, sharp
topped object and so on, or touching the screen
hard may damage it.
• Tablet PC’s operations such as ick, pinch in and
pinch out cannot be performed on this touch screen.
D Touch screen maintenance
• If the touch screen becomes dusty or dirty, wipe it
clean with a soft, dry cloth.
• When you wipe the touch screen, be careful not to
push it too hard or scratch it with your nger nails.
Otherwise you may damage the screen.
The following items are included on the CD.
• Full manual (English)
Instructions for full operations, the same as this
manual.
• Basic manual (English)
Instructions for basic operations, the same manual
supplied with the transceiver.
• Basic manual
(German, Spanish, French, Italian, and other)
Instructions for basic operations in German,
Spanish, French, Italian, and other languages.
This manual may not be included, depending on the
transceiver version.
• Schematic diagram
Includes the schematic and block diagrams.
• HAM radio Terms
A glossary of HAM radio terms.
• Adobe
®
Reader
®
Installer
Installer for Adobe
®
Reader
®
.
A PC with the following Operating System is required.
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
10
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8.1
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7
• Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
To read the manuals or Schematic diagram, Adobe
®
Reader
®
is required. If you have not installed it,
please install the Adobe
®
Reader
®
on the CD or
download it from Adobe Systems Incorporated’s
website.
Starting the CD
1. Insert the CD into the CD drive.
2. Double click “Menu.exe” on the CD.
• Depending on the PC setting, the menu screen shown
below is automatically displayed.
3. Click the desired button to open the file.
L To close the Menu screen, click [Quit].
Closes the Menu screenInstalls the Adobe
®
Reader
®
Opens the
Full manual
(this manual)
Opens the
Schematic
diagram
Opens the
Glossary
ABOUT THE SUPPLIED CD
Opens the English
Basic manual
Opens the multi-
language Basic manual
L Different types of menu screen may be displayed,
depending on the transceiver version.
iv
Functions and features of Adobe
®
Reader
®
The following functions and features can be used with Adobe
®
Reader
®
.
• Keyword search
Click “Find (Ctrl+F)”
or “Advanced Search
(Shift+Ctrl+F)” in the Edit menu
to open the search screen.
This is convenient when
searching for a particular word or
phrase in this manual.
* The menu screen may differ,
depending on the Adobe
®
Reader
®
version.
• Find screen
• Advanced search screen
Click to open the nd or search
screen or advanced search screen.
• Printing out the desired pages.
Click “Print (P)” in File menu, and then select the
paper size and page numbers you want to print.
* The printing setup may differ, depending on the
printer. Refer to your printer’s instruction manual
for details.
* Select “A4” size to print out the page in the
equalized size.
• Read Out Loud feature.
The Read Out Loud feature reads aloud the text in
this Instruction Manual.
Refer to the Adobe
®
Reader
®
Help for the details.
( This feature may not be usable, depending on your
PC environment including the operating system.)
*The screen may differ, depending on the Adobe
®
Reader
®
version.
v
ABOUT THE INSTRUCTIONS
Instruction example
MENU
» SET > Display > Display Type
Detailed instruction
1. Push
MENU
.
Push
• Opens the MENU screen.
2. Touch [SET].
MENU screen
• Opens the SET screen.
3. Rotate
MULTI
, and then push
MULTI
to select
“Display.”
Rotate
Push
4. Rotate
MULTI
, and then push
MULTI
to select
“Display Type.”
SET screen
Rotate
Push
The Full and Basic manuals are described based on
the following:
“ ” (Quotation marks):
Used to indicate icons, setting items, and screen titles
displayed on the screen.
The screen titles are also indicated in uppercase letters.
(Example: FUNCTION screen)
[ ] (brackets):
Used to indicate keys.
Routes to the set modes and setting screens
Routes to the set mode, setting screen and the setting
items are shown in the following manner.
DISPLAY screen
“Display Type” screen
vi
PRECAUTIONS
R DANGER HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER touch an
antenna or antenna connector while transmitting. This could
cause an electrical shock or burn.
R DANGER! NEVER operate the transceiver near
unshielded electrical blasting caps or in an explosive
atmosphere. This could cause an explosion and death.
R WARNING RF EXPOSURE! This device emits Radio
Frequency (RF) energy. Extreme caution should be
observed when operating this device. If you have any
questions regarding RF exposure and safety standards
please refer to the Federal Communications Commission
Ofce of Engineering and Technology’s report on
Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields (OET Bulletin 65).
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver with a
headset or other audio accessories at high volume levels. If
you experience a ringing in your ears,reduce the volume or
discontinue use.
R WARNING! NEVER apply AC power to the [DC13.8V]
socket on the transceiver rear panel. This could cause a re
or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC to the
[DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear panel. This could
cause a re or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER reverse the DC power cable
polarity. This could cause a re or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER remove the fuse holder on the DC
power cable. Excessive current caused by a short could
cause a re or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER let metal, wire or other objects
contact the inside of the transceiver, or make incorrect
contact with connectors on the rear panel. This could cause
an electric shock or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER operate or touch the transceiver
with wet hands. This could cause an electric shock or
damage to the transceiver.
R WARNING! Immediately turn OFF the transceiver power
and remove the DC power cable from the transceiver if it
emits an abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your
Icom dealer or distributor for advice.
R WARNING! NEVER put the transceiver on an unstable
place where the transceiver may suddenly move or fall.
This could cause an injury or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver during a
lightning storm. It may result in an electric shock, cause
a re or damage the transceiver. Always disconnect the
power souce and antenna before a storm.
CAUTION: NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow or
any liquids.
CAUTION: NEVER change the internal settings of the
transceiver. This could reduce transceiver performance
and/or damage to the transceiver. The transceiver warranty
does not cover any problems caused by unauthorized
internal adjustments.
CAUTION: NEVER install or place the transceiver in a
place without adequate ventilation, or block any cooling
vents on the top, rear, sides or bottom of the transceiver.
Heat dissipation may be reduced and damage the
transceiver.
CAUTION: NEVER use harsh solvents such as Benzine or
alcohol when cleaning, as they will damage the transceiver
surfaces.
CAUTION: NEVER leave the transceiver in areas with
temperatures below –10°C (+14°F) or above +60°C
(+140°F) for mobile operations.
CAUTION: NEVER place the transceiver in excessively
dusty environments. This could damage the transceiver.
DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or putting
anything on top of the transceiver. This may overheat the
transceiver.
BE CAREFUL! The Main unit will become hot when
operating the transceiver continuously for long periods of
time.
CAUTION: If you use a linear amplier, set the
transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear
amplier’s maximum input level, otherwise a high input
could damage the linear amplier.
CAUTION: Use only Icom supplied or optional
microphones. Other manufacturer’s microphones may have
different pin assignments, and could damage the connector
and/or the transceiver.
NEVER leave the transceiver in an insecure place to avoid
use by unauthorized persons.
Turn OFF the transceiver’s power and/or disconnect the AC
power cable when you will not use the transceiver for a long
period of time.
Turn OFF the transceiver’s power and/or disconnect the DC
power cable when you will not use the transceiver for long
period of time.
The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections
that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a
malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD
displays.
1-1
Section 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel ............................................................................. 1-2
Rear panel .............................................................................. 1-4
Touch screen .......................................................................... 1-5
D Multi-function menus ....................................................... 1-7
D MENU screen ................................................................. 1-7
D FUNCTION screen ......................................................... 1-7
D QUICK MENU ................................................................. 1-7
Keyboard entering and editing................................................ 1-8
D Entering and editing characters ...................................... 1-8
D Keyboard types ............................................................... 1-8
D Entering and editing ........................................................ 1-8
D Entering and editing example ......................................... 1-9
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-2
Front panel
q POWER KEY
(p. 3-2)
Turns the transceiver ON or OFF.
w TRANSMIT KEY
TRANSMIT
(p. 3-10)
Toggles between transmit and receive.
e ANTENNA TUNER KEY
TUNER
(p. 11-2)
Turns the antenna tuner ON or OFF, or activates
the tuner.
r VOX/BREAK-IN KEY
VOX/BK-IN
Turns the VOX function (p. 4-10) and Break-in
function (p. 4-15) ON or OFF.
t HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES] (p. 2-2)
Connects to a standard stereo headphones.
y MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC] (p. 2-2)
Connects to the supplied or an optional microphone.
u VOLUME CONTROL
AF RF/SQL
(p. 3-2)
Adjusts the audio output level.
i SD CARD SLOT [SD CARD] (p. 8-2)
Accepts an SD card.
o RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL
AF RF/SQL
(p. 3-10)
Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold levels.
!0 MENU KEY
MENU
(p. 1-7)
Opens the MENU screen.
q
w
e
r
t
y
i !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !6 !7u o !8!5
!9
!1 FUNCTION KEY
FUNCTION
(p. 1-7)
Displays the FUNCTION screen.
!2 MINI SCOPE KEY
M.SCOPE
(p. 5-2)
Displays the Mini Scope or Spectrum Scope.
!3 QUICK KEY
QUICK
(p. 1-7)
Displays the QUICK MENU.
!4 EXIT KEY
EXIT
(p. 1-7)
Exits a setting screen or returns to the previous
screen.
!5 AUTO TUNE KEY
AUTO
TUNE
(p. 4-16)
Automatically tunes the operating frequency to a
received CW signal.
!6 SPEECH/LOCK KEY
SPEECH
Announces the operating frequency or receiving
mode (p. 13-2), or electronically locks
MAIN DIAL
(p.3-10).
!7 FRICTION ADJUSTER (13-2)
Adjusts the friction of
MAIN DIAL
.
!8 MAIN DIAL
MAIN DIAL
(p. 3-4)
Changes the operating frequency.
!9 MEMORY CHANNEL UP/DOWN KEY
▲
/
▼
(p. 9-3)
Changes the Memory channel.
This section describes the keys, controls and dials that you use to operate the IC-7300.
Refer to the pages posted beside each key, control, or dial for details.
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-3
Front panel (Continued)
@0
@1
@2
@6
#3#4
@8@9 @3
#1 #0
@5@7 @4
#2
@0 MEMO PAD KEY
MPAD
(p. 9-6)
Sequentially calls up the contents in the Memo
Pads, or saves the displayed contents into the
Memo Pad.
@1 VFO/MEMORY KEY
V/M
(p. 3-2)
Switches between the VFO and Memory mode, or
copies the memory channel contents to the VFO.
@2 CLEAR KEY
CLEAR
Clears the RIT (p. 4-3) or TX shift frequency
(p. 4-11).
@3 A/B KEY
A/B
(p. 3-2)
Switches between VFO A and VFO B, or sets the
selected VFO’s frequency to the other VFO.
@4 TX KEY
TX
(p. 4-11)
Turns the TX function ON or OFF.
@5 RIT KEY
RIT
(p. 4-3)
Turns the Receiver Incremental Tuning (RIT)
function ON or OFF.
@6 SPLIT KEY
SPLIT
(p. 4-13)
Turns the Split function ON or OFF.
@7 MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL
MULTI
(p. 1-7)
Displays the Multi-function menu for various
adjustments, or selects a desired item.
@8 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK KEY
XFC
(p. 4-13)
Enables you to monitor the transmit frequency while
holding it down in the Split mode.
@9 TX/RX INDICATOR (p. 3-10)
Lights red while transmitting and lights green while
receiving.
#0 NOISE REDUCTION KEY
NR
(p. 4-9)
Turns the Noise Reduction function ON or OFF.
#1 NOTCH KEY
NOTCH
(p. 4-9)
TurnstheNotchlterONorOFF.
#2
TWIN PASSBAND TUNING CONTROL
TWIN PBT
CLR
(p. 4-5)
AdjuststheIFlter’spassbandwidthbyrotating,
and clears the setting by holding down for 1 second.
#3 PREAMP/ATTENUATOR KEY
P.AMP
ATT
(p. 4-3)
Turns ON or OFF, and selects one of two receive
RFpreampliersorturnstheAttenuatorONorOFF.
#4 NOISE BLANKER KEY
NB
(p. 4-8)
Turns the Noise Blanker ON or OFF.
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-4
Rear panel
q DC POWER SOCKET [DC 13.8 V] (p. 2-3)
Accepts 13.8 V DC through the DC power cable.
w GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 2-2)
Connects to ground to prevent electrical shocks,
TVI, BCI and other problems.
e ANTENNA CONNECTOR [ANT] (p. 2-3)
Connectstoa50ΩPL-259coaxconnector.
r SOCKET [ACC] (p. 2-3)
Connects to devices to control an external unit or to
control the transceiver.
t USB PORT (B TYPE) [USB] (p. 2-3)
Connects to a PC.
y CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]
(p. 2-3)
Connects to a PC or other transceiver for external
control.
u EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP] (p. 2-3)
Acceptsa4~8Ωexternalspeaker.
i KEY JACK [KEY] (p. 2-3)
Connects to a straight key, external electronic
keyer,orapaddlewith6.35mm(1⁄4")stereoplug.
o SEND CONTROL JACK [SEND] (p. 2-3)
Connects to control transmit with non-Icom external
units.
!0 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 2-3)
Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom
linearamplier.
!1 TUNER CONTROL SOCKET [TUNER] (p. 2-3)
Accepts the control cable from an optional
AH-4 automatic antenna tuner or AH-740
automatic tuning antenna.
!2 COOLING FAN
Cools the PA unit when necessary.
q
w
e
r y ut
o!0!1 i!2
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-5
Touch screen
q TUNE ICON (p. 11-2)
Appears while tuning the antenna.
w MODE INDICATOR (p. 3-3)
Displays the selected operating mode.
e PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR
(p. 4-5)
Graphically displays the passband width for twin
PBT operation and the center frequency for IF shift
operation.
r TONE INDICATOR (p. 4-29)
Displays the selected tone type in the tone
operation mode.
t IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 4-6)
DisplaystheselectedIFlter.
y QUICK TUNING ICON (p. 3-4)
Appears when the Quick Tuning Step function is
ON.
u IP PLUS ICON (p. 4-7)
Appears when the IP Plus function is ON.
i MEMORY NAME READOUT/AUTO TUNE ICON
Displays the memory name if entered (p. 9-5), or
displays the “AUTOTUNE” icon when the Auto
Tuning function is ON (p. 4-16).
This section describes the icons, screens, dialogs, readouts and so on that are displayed on the IC-7300 screen.
Refer to the pages posted beside each item for details.
o M1~M8/T1~T8/OVF ICON
Displays “M1”~“M8” while “External Keypad” on
the CONNECTORS screen is set to ON and using
the Memory Keyer function (p. 4-18). Displays
“T1”~“T8” while using the Voice TX memory. (p. 7-4)
Displays “OVF” when an excessively strong signal is
received.
!0 VOICE RECORDER ICON (p. 6-2)
Appears while recording.
!1 SD CARD ICON (p. 8-2)
Appears when an SD card is inserted, or blinks
while accessing the SD card.
!2 CLOCK READOUT (p. 12-11)
Displays the current local time.
Touch the readout to display both the current local
time and UTC time.
!3 SPLIT ICON (p. 4-13)
Appears when the Split function is ON.
!4 VFO/MEMORY ICON (p. 3-2)
“VFO A” or “VFO B” appears when the VFO
mode is selected, and “MEMO” appears when the
Memory mode is selected.
!5 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUT (p. 3-2)
Displays the selected memory channel number.
q w e t i o !0 !1 !2
!3
!4
!5
yr u
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-6
Touch screen (Continued)
!6 RIT ICON
(p. 4-2)
Appears while the RIT function is ON.
!7 TX ICON (p. 4-11)
Appears while the TX function is ON.
!8 SHIFT FREQUENCY READOUT
Displays the shift offset of the RIT (p. 4-2) or
TX (p. 4-11) functions, while the functions are ON.
!9 SPECTRUM SCOPE SCREEN (p. 5-2)
Displayed while using the Spectrum Scope.
@0 FUNCTION DISPLAY
Displays the operating parameters, modes,
frequencies and indicators, depending on your
selections.
@1 MULTI-FUNCTION METER (p. 3-11)
Displays various strengths and levels, depending
on the function you select.
@2 RF GAIN ICON
(p. 3-10)
Appears when
AF RF/SQL
(outer) is set to the
counterclockwise from the 11 o’clock position. The
icon indicates that the RF gain is reduced.
@3 BK-IN/F-BKIN/VOX INDICATOR (p. 4-15)
Appears while the Semi Break-in, Full Break-in or
VOX function is ON.
@4 FREQUENCY READOUT (p. 3-4)
Displays the operating frequency.
@5 LMT DISPLAY (p. 13-4)
Appearsifthepowerampliertemperature
becomes extremely high and the Protection
function is activated after transmitting continuously
for long periods of time.
@6 TX STATUS INDICATOR (p. 3-10)
Displays the transmit status of the displayed
frequency.
• appears while transmitting.
•
appears when the selected frequency is outside of
the amateur band frequency range.
•
TX
appears while transmitter is inhibited (p. 3-4)
@6
@3
@2
!7
!8
@4
@1
!9
@0
!6
@5
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-7
Touch screen (Continued)
D Multi-function menus
z Open the Multi-function menu by pushing
MULTI
(Multi-function control).
z Open different types of menus by holding down
VOX/BK-IN
,
NB
,
NR
, or
NOTCH
for 1 second.
z While the Multi-function menu is opened, touch the
desired item and rotate
MULTI
to set the desired
value.
D MENU screen
z Open the MENU screen by pushing
MENU
.
D FUNCTION screen
z Open the FUNCTION screen by pushing
FUNCTION
.
LTo close the FUNCTION screen, push
EXIT
.
D QUICK MENU
z Open the QUICK MENU by pushing
QUICK
.
Rotate
Push
Multi-function menu
Touch the edge to
turn ON and OFF
FUNCTION screen
Function
name
Selected
value
Lights blue
or orange
when used
SSB SSB-D CW RTTY
RF POWER RF POWER RF POWER RF POWER
MIC GAIN MIC GAIN KEY SPEED
TPF
*
COMP
*
CW PITCH
MONITOR
*
MONITOR
*
MONITOR
*
FM AM NB NR
RF POWER RF POWER LEVEL LEVEL
MIC GAIN MIC GAIN DEPTH
WIDTH
MONITOR
*
MONITOR
*
NOTCH VOX BK-IN
POSITION GAIN DELAY
WIDTH
*
ANTI VOX
DELAY
VOICE DELAY
SHORT
*
P.AMP/ATT AGC
*
2
NOTCH
*
2
NB
*
2
OFF FAST OFF OFF
P.AMP1 MID AN ON
P.AMP2 SLOW MN
ATT
*
1
NR
*
2
IP+ VOX
*
2
BKIN
*
2
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON BKIN
F-BKIN
COMP
*
2
TONE
*
2
TBW 1/4
OFF OFF WIDE OFF
ON TONE MID ON
TSQL NAR
MONI
*
2
OFF
ON
Multi-function menu items
FUNCTION screen list
* Touch the edge to turn the function ON or OFF, or
adjust.
*
1
Touch for 1 second to select the function.
*
2
Touch for 1 second to open its function menu.
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-8
Keyboard entering and editing
D Entering and editing characters
You can enter and edit the items in the following table.
Category Screen Selectable characters
Total
characters
Information
MENU MY CALL
A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), / @ - .
10
MEMORY MEMORY NAME
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, (space), @ % & # +
-=[]/():;˄!?.,
10
FUNCTION
KEYER MEMORY
AtoZ,0to9,(space),/?^.,@
70
“*” (asterisk) has its unique use.
RTTY MEMORY
AtoZ,0to9,(space),!$&?"'-/.,:;
( ) ↵
70
VOICE TX
RECORD
AtoZ,atoz,0to9,(space),˽!"#$%&
'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[
\ ] ^_ˋ{�}~
16
SD Card FILE NAME
AtoZ,atoz,0to9,(space),˽!"#$%&
'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[
\ ] ^_ˋ{�}~
15
Illegal characters:
/:;*<>
D Keyboard types
You can select the Full Keyboard or Ten-key in
“Keyboard Type” on the FUNCTION screen. (p. 12-7)
MENU
» SET>Function>Keyboard Type
L You can also temporarily switch in the QUICK MENU by
pushing
QUICK
.
D Entering and editing
Clears the entered character
Selects alphabet mode
or number mode
Enters a space
Selects the character type
Saves the entry
Cancels entry and returns to the
previous screen
Enters an uppercase letter
Moves the cursor backward
Moves the cursor forward
Alphabet mode
Number mode
Symbol mode
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-9
Keyboard entering and editing (Continued)
D Entering and editing example
Entering “DX spot 1” in the Memory channel 2
1. Open the MEMORY screen.
MENU
» MEMORY
2. Touch the memory channel 2 for 1 second.
You can also
open the
QUICK MENU
by touching this
key.
• Opens the QUICK MENU.
3. Select “Edit Name.”
Rotate
Push
• Opens the MEMORY NAME screen.
4. Touch [  ], and then touch [D].
5. Touch [  ] again, and then touch [X].
6. Touch [SPACE].
• Enters a space.
7. Touch [s], [p], [o], and then [t].
8. Touch [SPACE].
• Enters a space.
9. Touch [ab].
• Opens the entry CHARACTER TYPE screen.
10. Touch [12].
11. Touch [1].
12. Touch [ENT] to save the entry.
• Returns to the previous screen.
2-1
Section 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Selecting a location ................................................................ 2-2
Heat dissipation ...................................................................... 2-2
Grounding ............................................................................... 2-2
Front panel connection ........................................................... 2-2
Rear panel connection............................................................ 2-3
Connecting an external DC power supply ............................. 2-4
Connecting the antenna tuner ................................................ 2-4
FSK and AFSK connections ................................................... 2-5
Linear amplier connections ................................................... 2-6
D Connecting the IC-PW1/IC-PW1EURO .......................... 2-6
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplier .......................... 2-6
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
2-2
Selecting a location
Select a location for the transceiver that allows
adequate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold
or vibrations, and other electromagnetic sources.
The transceiver has a stand for desktop use.
Stand
CAUTION: NEVER carry the transceiver by holding the
stand, dials, controls and so on. This may damage them.
Heat dissipation
Grounding
To prevent electrical shock, television
interference (TVI), broadcast
interference (BCI) and other
problems, ground the transceiver
using the ground terminal [GND] on
the rear panel.
For best results, connect a heavy
gauge wire or strap to a long ground
rod. Make the distance between the
[GND] terminal and ground as short
as possible.
RWARNING! NEVER connect the [GND] terminal
to a gas or electric pipe, since the connection could
cause an explosion or electric shock.
Front panel connection
[MIC] (Microphone) connector
SM-50
(Option)
SM-30
(Option)
HM-219
(Supplied)
Using an External Keypad
You can control the CW memory keyer, Voice memory or
RTTY memory keyer transmission from an external keypad by
connecting the control circuit to the [MIC] connector. Set the
“External Keypad” to ON on the CONNECTORS screen to use
the external keypad. (p. 12-8)
Accepts headphones with 8~16 Ω
impedance.
• Outputs 5 mW into an 8 Ω load.
• The volume level may differ,
depending on the headphones.
[PHONES] Headphones
• DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or put
anything on top of the transceiver. This may block
airow and overheat the transceiver.
• NEVER install the transceiver in a place without
adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation may be
reduced, and the transceiver may be damaged.
• DO NOT touch the transceiver after transmitting
continuously for long periods of time. The transceiver
may become hot.
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
2-3
Rear panel connection
[DC 13.8 V] DC power supply
(p. 18-4)
Use the optional
PS-126 or a power
supply with 13.8 V DC
output and a current
capacity of at least
21 A.
[KEY] (CW key) jack (p. 18-4)
(6.35 mm: 1/4 in (d))
You can use a straight or bug key when
the internal electronic keyer is OFF.
[GND] (Ground)
Grounding prevents
electrical shock, TVI
and other problems.
[ANT] (antenna) connector
Connect a 50 Ω antenna for the HF, 50/70 MHz
frequency bands.
[REMOTE] jack (p. 18-4)
(3.5 mm: 1/8 in (d))
Remotely controls the
transceiver, using the
optional RS-BA1, or
CI-V commands.
[TUNER] control socket (p. 2-4)
Connect the control cable
from an optional AH-4
automatic antenna tuner
or AH-740
automatic
tuning antenna. The AH-2b
is connected to the AH-4.
AH-4
(Option)
AH-2b
(Option)
[EXT-SP]
(External speaker) jack
(p. 18-4) (3.5 mm: 1/8 in (d))
SP-34
(Option)
Impedance: 4~8 Ω
Audio level: More than
2.5 W at 10% distortion
into an 8 Ω load
[ALC]/[SEND] jack
Connect with an RCA plug
[ALC] jack connects to the ALC
output jack of a non-Icom linear
amplier.
[SEND] jack is used to control
an external non-Icom linear
amplier.
[USB] port
• Remotely controls the transceiver using
CI-V commands.
• Sends the received audio to the PC
• Inputs modulation
• Sends the decoded RTTY outputs to the PC.
• Remote control operation using the optional
RS-BA1.
( Icom does not guarantee the performance of the
PC, network device or network settings)
[ACC] (accessory) socket (p. 18-2)
Connects control lines for external devices
such as a TNC or a PC.
Refer to the external device’s instruction
manual for connection.
Paddle Straight key
PS-126 (option)
AH-740
(Option)
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
2-4
Connecting an external DC power supply
Conrm that the transceiver is OFF before connecting
the DC power cable.
L We recommend using Icom’s optional PS-126
(DC 13.8 V/25 A) power supply.
L When connecting a non-Icom DC power cable, the
transceiver needs:
• DC 13.8 V (Capacity: At least 21 Amps)
• A power supply with an over current protective line and
low voltage uctuation or ripple.
_+
PS-126
Non-Icom DC power supply
PS-126
AC cable DC power cable
IC-7300
q
w
When disconnecting, rmly
push down the locking tab
and then pull the connector
out of the socket.
GND
Supplied DC
power cable
BlackRed
Connecting the antenna tuner
The AH-4 matches the IC-7300 to
the optional
AH-2b or a long wire antenna more than 7 m/23 ft long
(between 3.5 MHz and 50 MHz).
NOTE: Before connecting, be sure to turn OFF the
transceiver power.
L See the AH-4 instruction manual for installation and
connection details.
GND
AH-4
GND
[ANT]
IC-7300
[TUNER]
HF band long wire
antenna
Or to an optional AH-2b
Control cable
Fuses
CAUTION:
DO NOT touch the cooling fan on the rear panel
of the transceiver after transmitting continuously for long
periods of time. The transceiver becomes extremely hot.
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
2-5
FSK and AFSK connections
The transceiver has a mode key for RTTY. You can use a PC and an application software to operate RTTY using a
USB cable. However, if you want to operate RTTY or other digital modes, you can use the ACC socket on the rear
panel through an interface unit. Refer to the software application’s instruction manual for setup details.
( Icom does not guarantee performance of the application software, PC, network device or network settings.)
(1) When using the USB port
Type B
To the
USB port
Type A
IC-7300
A user supplied A/B USB cable
PC
Install the RTTY
application software
To a USB port
TIP:
• If you set the “USB Serial Function” item to “RTTY Decode,” the decoded RTTY signals are output from the USB port.
MENU
» SET > Connectors > USB Serial Function
• You can download the USB driver and the installation guide from the Icom website.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html
(Support > Firmware Updates/Software Downloads > Transceiver)
(2) When using the ACC socket or the microphone connector
CE B
2 kΩ：2 kΩ 10 kΩ
2 kΩ：2 kΩ
10 kΩ
4.7 kΩ
RTS
GND
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
D-Sub 25
D-Sub 9
CE B
4.7 kΩ
TXD
*1
*1
*2
*2
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
E
D
C
F
E
A
D
C
B
SQL
q w e r
t y u i
o !0 !1 !2
!3
• When connecting to [ACC]
ACC
(Trimpot)
Shield cable
Shield cable
Shield cable
Shield cable
• When connecting to [MIC]
Shield cable
No connection
No connection
Connect to
LINE IN or
MIC IN
Connect to
SP OUT
Connect to
COM port
Pin 4
Pin 7
Pin 7
Pin 5
Pin 2 Pin 3
(Rear panel view)
(Front panel view)
NOTE: You can operate ONLY
AFSK RTTY when you connect
the circuit to the microphone
connector.
PC
*1 NPN transistor
(2SC1815)
*2 Switching diode
(1S1588)
(Trimpot)
Interface circuit
example for digital
modes
(User supplied)
The sections shown in short dashes are required only when Baudot RTTY is used in the FSK (RTTY) mode.
(Not requeired for other digital modes such as SSTV or PSK)
L See pages 18-2 to
18-3 for details on
the ACC socket and
MIC connector.
• ACC: Connect to [C]
• MIC: Connect to [F]
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
2-6
Linear amplier connections
D Connecting the IC-PW1/IC-PW1EURO
See the illustration below to connect the optional IC-PW1 or IC-PW1EURO hf/50 mhz all band 1 kw linear amplifier.
Refer to the amplier’s instruction manual for operation.
EXCITER
1 1&2
[ACC-1]
[REMOTE][ANT]
[ANT]
IC-7300
GND
GND
[ACC]
[REMOTE]
[INPUT 1]
IC-PW1/IC-PW1EURO
To an
antenna
Remote control cable
ACC cable
7-pin side
OPC-599 conversion cable
AC outlet
Coaxial cable
Non-European versions: 100~120/200~240 V
European version: 230 V
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplier
See the illustration below to connect a non-Icom linear amplier.
RF OUT RF IN
ALC
SEND
[ALC] [SEND]
[ANT]
GND
IC-7300
To an antenna
Non-Icom linear amplier
R WARNING!
• The maximum signal level of the [SEND] jack is 16 V/0.5 A DC with the initial setting, and 250 V/ 200 mA with the “MOSFET”
setting. Use an external unit if your non-Icom linear amplier requires a control voltage and/or current greater than specied.
• The ALC input level must be in the range 0 to –4 V. The transceiver does not accept a positive voltage. Non-matched ALC
and RF power settings could overheat or damage the linear amplier.
• When using a linear amplier such as the IC-PW1 or IC-PW1EURO, set the RF POWER in the Multi-function menu to keep
the ALC meter in the red zone.
LSee page 3-10 for details on the RF POWER
LSee page 3-11 for details on the ALC zone.
3-1
Section 3
BASIC OPERATION
When rst applying power ...................................................... 3-2
Turning power ON or OFF ...................................................... 3-2
Adjusting the volume level ...................................................... 3-2
About the VFO and Memory modes ....................................... 3-2
Using the VFO mode .............................................................. 3-2
D Selecting VFO A or VFO B .............................................. 3-2
D Equalizing VFO A and VFO B ......................................... 3-2
Selecting the operating band .................................................. 3-3
D Using the band stacking registers ................................... 3-3
Selecting the operating mode ................................................. 3-3
Setting the frequency.............................................................. 3-4
D Using the Main Dial ......................................................... 3-4
D About the Tuning Step function ....................................... 3-4
D Changing the Tuning Step .............................................. 3-4
D About the 1 Hz step Fine Tuning function ....................... 3-4
D About the 1/4 Tuning function ......................................... 3-5
D About the Auto Tuning Step function .............................. 3-5
D Directly entering a frequency .......................................... 3-5
D Band Edge Beep ............................................................. 3-6
D Entering a Band Edge ..................................................... 3-7
RF gain and SQL level ......................................................... 3-10
Dial Lock function ................................................................. 3-10
Basic transmission................................................................ 3-10
Adjusting the transmit output power ..................................... 3-10
D Adjusting the transmit output power ............................. 3-10
Meter display .........................................................................3-11
D Meter display selection ..................................................3-11
D Multi-function meter .......................................................3-11
Adjusting the microphone gain ..............................................3-11
About the 5 MHz frequency band
operation (USA version only) ............................................ 3-12
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-2
When rst applying power
Before turning ON your transceiver for the rst time,
make sure all of the following are correctly connected.
• DC power cable
• Antenna
• Grounding wire
• Microphone*
* Different devices may be used, depending on the
operating mode.
If all listed above are correctly connected, set
AF RF/SQL
(inner/outer) to the positions described
below.
TIP: When you turn OFF the transceiver, it memorizes
the current settings. Therefore, when you turn ON the
transceiver again, the it restarts with the same settings.
z To turn ON the transceiver, push
.
z To turn OFF the transceiver, hold down
for
2 seconds until “POWER OFF...” is displayed.
Turning power ON or OFF
Rotate
AF RF/SQL
(inner) to adjust the volume level.
Adjusting the volume level
12 oʼclock position (outer)
Maximum counterclockwise (inner)
About the VFO and Memory modes
Using the VFO mode
VFO mode
You can set the desired frequency by rotating
MAIN DIAL
.
Memory mode
You can enter contents into the memory channels in
the MEMORY list.
Selecting the VFO mode or Memory mode
Push
V/M
to select the VFO or Memory mode.
The IC-7300 has 2 Variable Frequency Oscillators
(VFO), “A” and “B.” Having 2 VFOs is convenient to
quickly select 2 frequencies, or for split frequency
operation (p. 4-13). You can use either of the VFOs to
operate on a frequency and mode.
D Selecting VFO A or VFO B
Push
A/B
to select the VFO A or VFO B.
D Equalizing VFO A and VFO B
You can set the displayed VFO’s frequency and mode
to the VFO that is not displayed.
Hold down
A/B
until 2 short beeps sound.
VFO mode
(Example: VFO A)
Memory mode
(Example: Memory channel 1)
V/M
VFO A VFO B
A/B
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-3
Selecting the operating band
Do the following steps to change the operating band.
Also, the band stacking register provides 3 memories
for each band key to store frequencies and operating
modes. This function is convenient to quickly recall
previously operated frequencies and modes.
D Using the band stacking registers
Follow the steps below to enter a register on the
selected band. (Example: Memorizing 21 MHz)
1. Touch the MHz digits. (Example: 14)
• Opens the BAND STACKING REGISTER screen.
2. Touch a band key. (Example: [21])
• Displays a 21 MHz frequency.
TIP: Selecting a different Register
L Touching the band key for 1 second changes between
the 3 Registers.
LTouch
to return to the previous screen.
3. Set the frequency and the operating mode.
(Example: 21.30000 MHz in the USB mode)
4. Touch the MHz digits again.
L The frequency and operating mode set in step 3 is
memorized in the top Register.
5. By repeating the steps above, the Register that a
new frequency and operating mode are set in is
memorized.
Selecting the operating mode
You can select between the SSB, SSB data, CW, CW
reverse, RTTY, RTTY reverse, AM, AM data, FM and
FM data modes.
1. Touch the mode icon (example: USB).
Mode key Operating mode
[SSB] LSB USB
[CW] CW CW-R
[RTTY] RTTY RTTY-R
[AM] AM
[FM] FM
[DATA]
LSB LSB-D
USB USB-D
AM AM-D
FM FM-D
Selecting the Data mode
You can operate RTTY in the data mode using AFSK
(Audio Frequency Shift Keying). (p. 4-31)
L When a data mode is selected, you can mute the input
from the microphone. (p. 12-8)
MENU
» SET > Connectors > DATA MOD
(Example: selecting the USB-D mode)
1. While the USB mode is selected, touch the mode
icon.
• Opens the MODE screen.
2. Touch [DATA].
2. In the MODE screen, touch the desired mode key.
(Example: CW).
L In the SSB, AM or FM modes, the [DATA] key is
displayed.
MODE screen
• Operating mode selection list
LTouch mode key to select the operating mode
BAND STACKING REGISTER screen
MODE screen
• The USB-D mode is selected.
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-4
Setting the frequency
D About the Tuning Step function
You can set the
MAIN DIAL
’s tuning step for each
operating mode. The following steps are set as
default.
• SSB/CW/RTTY (TS OFF): 10 Hz
• AM (TS ON): 1 kHz
• FM (TS ON): 10 kHz
Touch the kHz digits to turn the Tuning Step function
ON or OFF.
L The Tuning Step function's icon “▼” is displayed above
the 1 kHz digit.
D About the 1 Hz step Fine Tuning
function
You can use the minimum tuning step of 1 Hz for ne
tuning in the SSB, CW and RTTY modes.
Touch the Hz digits for 1 second to turn the Fine
Tuning function ON or OFF.
D Changing the Tuning Step
When the Tuning Step function is ON, you can change
the tuning steps for each operating mode.
1. Select the desired operating mode. (p. 3-3)
(Example: USB)
2. Touch the kHz digit for 1 second.
• The TS (SSB) screen is displayed.
The Tuning Step
function is ON.
D Using the Main Dial
1. Select the desired operating band.
(Example: 21 MHz)
BAND STACKING REGISTER screen
2. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
.
L If you cannot change the frequency, make sure the
Dial Lock function is turned OFF. (p. 3-10)
L
is displayed when you set an amateur radio
frequency, and
is displayed when you set a
frequency outside the Ham band, or outside your set
Band Edges.
3. Touch the desired tuning step.
(Example: 0.1 k)
• The tuning step is set and returns to the previous
screen.
TS (SSB) screen
The Tuning
Step function is
ON.
L When using the [UP]/[DN] keys on the microphone,
the frequency changes in 50 Hz steps with the Fine
Tuning function ON or OFF.
1Hz digit
• The 1 Hz digit is displayed.
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-5
Setting the frequency (Continued)
D About the 1/4 Tuning function
Mode: SSB-D/CW/RTTY
With the Tuning Function OFF, turn ON the 1⁄4 Tuning
function to reduce the tuning speed to 1⁄4 of the
normal speed, for ner tuning.
1. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
2. Touch [1/4].
1/4 Tuning
function
3. Push
EXIT
.
D Directly entering a frequency
You can set the frequency without rotating
MAIN DIAL
by directly entering it on the keypad.
Entering the operating frequency
1. Touch the MHz digits.
(Example: 14)
• Opens the F-INP screen.
3. Start entry with the MHz digits.
LTo clear the entry, touch [CE].
L To clear the entry and return to the previous screen,
push
EXIT
.
• Opens the BAND STACKING REGISTER screen.
2. Touch [F-INP].
BAND STACKING REGISTER screen
F-INP screen (Example:14.025)
4. Touch [ENT] to set the entered frequency.
• Closes the F-INP screen.
L If you touch [ENT] when the digits under 100 kHz are
not entered, “0” will be automatically entered into the
digits that are blank.
Entry examples
• 14.025 MHz: [1], [4], [•(−)], [0], [2], [5], [ENT]
• 18.0725 MHz: [1], [8], [•(−)], [0], [7], [2], [5], [ENT]
• 730 kHz: [0], [•(−)], [7], [3], [ENT]
• 5.100 MHz: [5], [•(−)], [1], [ENT]
• 7.000 MHz: [7], [ENT]
• Changing from 21.280 MHz to 21.245 MHz:
[•(−)], [2], [4], [5], [ENT]
FUNCTION screen
D About the Auto Tuning Step function
The tuning step automatically changes, depending on
the rotation speed of
MAIN DIAL
.
L You can change the Auto Tuning Step function settings in
the following menu. (p. 12-6)
MENU
» SET > Function > MAIN DIAL Auto TS
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-6
Setting the frequency (Continued)
Entering the Split Frequency Offset
1. Touch the MHz digits.
(Example: 14)
Entering a Memory channel
1. Touch
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
VFO mode
(Example: VFO A)
Memory mode
(Example: Memory channel 1)
V/M
• Opens the BAND STACKING REGISTER screen.
2. Touch [F-INP].
BAND STACKING REGISTER screen
• Opens the F-INP screen.
3. Enter the Split Frequency Offset.
LIf you want the minus shift direction, touch [•(−)].
L Enter the offset between −9.999 MHz and +9.999
MHz (1 kHz steps).
4. To save the entry, touch [SPLIT] or [−SPLIT].
• Closes the F-INP screen.
Entry examples
• 10 kHz: [1], [0], [SPLIT]
• −1.025 MHz: [•(−)], [1], [0], [2], [5], [−SPLIT]
L After entering, the Split function is automatically turned
ON.
2. Touch the MHz digits.
(Example: 14)
• Opens the BAND STACKING REGISTER screen.
3. Touch [F-INP].
• Opens the F-INP screen.
4. Enter a Memory channel number between 1 and
99. (Memory channel 5)
L If you want to set the Program Channel number (P1
or P2), enter “100” for P1, and “101” for P2.
BAND STACKING REGISTER screen
5. Touch [MEMO] to select the entered channel.
• Closes the F-INP screen.
D Band Edge Beep
You will hear a Band Edge Beep and will be
displayed when you tune into or out of an amateur
band’s frequency range.
L You can change the Band Edge Beep settings in the
following menu.
MENU
» SET > Function > Band Edge Beep
[SPLIT] or
[-SPLIT] is
displayed
Touch for -Split
F-INP screen
F-INP screen
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-7
Setting the frequency (Continued)
D Entering a Band Edge
When “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” is
selected on the “Band Edge Beep” screen, you can
enter a total of 30 band edge frequencies.
L Initially, all band edges are entered. Therefore, you must
rst edit or delete them to enter a new band edge.
L You cannot enter an overlapped frequency or a frequency
that is out of the preset transmit frequency.
1. Open the “Band Edge Beep” screen.
MENU
» SET > Function > Band Edge Beep
2. Select “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit.”
L If you select “ON (User) & TX Limit,” you can limit
transmission to within the entered frequency range.
3. Select “User Band Edge.”
“Band Edge Beep” screen
Rotate
Push
Rotate
Push
FUNCTION set screen
Editing a Band Edge
You can edit a band edge entered as a default or
when entering a new band edge.
1. On the FUNCTION set screen, select “User Band
Edge.”
2. Touch the band edge you want to edit for 1
second.
(Example: 5: 14.000.000 – 14.350.000 MHz)
Rotate
Push
3. Edit the lower band edge frequency.
(Example: 14.1)
4. Touch [ENT] to save the edited lower band edge
frequency.
5. Edit the upper band edge frequency.
(Example: 14.25)
6. Touch [ENT] to save the edited upper band edge
frequency.
L The edited band edge is saved and returns to the
previous screen.
TIP:
• You can also edit the frequency by rotating
MAIN DIAL
or
MULTI
.
• Each band edge must be higher in frequency than the
ones above it. If you try to enter a lower frequency than
the edges above, the lower frequency edge will be
cleared when you push [ENT].
“User Band Edge” screen
Entry examples
• 14.025 MHz: [1], [4], [•], [0], [2], [5], [ENT]
• 18.0725 MHz: [1], [8], [•], [0], [7], [2], [5], [ENT]
• 730 kHz: [0], [•], [7], [3], [ENT]
• 5.100 MHz: [5], [•], [1], [ENT]
• 7.000 MHz: [7], [ENT]
• Changing from 21.280 MHz to 21.245 MHz:
[•], [2], [4], [5], [ENT]
• Opens the “User Band Edge” screen.
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-8
Setting the frequency
Entering a new Band Edge
After you delete or edit the preset band edges, you
can enter a new band edge.
1. Open the “User Band Edge” screen.
2. Select a blank band.
(Example: 10)
3. Enter the lower band edge frequency.
(Example: 51.15)
Rotate
Push
4. Touch [ENT] to save the entered lower band edge
frequency.
5. Enter the upper band edge frequency.
(Example: .75)
6. Touch [ENT] to save the entered upper band edge
frequency.
“User Band Edge” screen
Deleting a Band Edge
To enter a new band edge, rst you must delete a
preset band edge.
L Initially, all band edges are entered. Therefore, you must
rst edit or delete them to enter a new band edge.
L You cannot enter an overlapped frequency or a frequency
that is out of the preset transmit frequency.
1. On the FUNCTION set screen, select “User Band
Edge.”
2. Touch the desired band edge to delete for 1
second.
(Example: 1: 1.800.000 – 1.999.999 MHz)
3. Touch “Delete.”
“User Band Edge” screen
1.800.000 – 1.999.999 MHz is deleted.
D Entering a Band Edge (Continued)
• The selected band edge is deleted and returns to the
previous screen.
• The entered band edge is saved and returns to the
previous screen.
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-9
Setting the frequency
D Entering a Band Edge (Continued)
Inserting a Band Edge
After you delete or edit the preset band edges, follow
the steps below to insert a band edge.
L Initially, all band edges are entered. Therefore, you must
rst edit or delete them to enter a new band edge.
L You cannot enter an overlapped frequency or a frequency
that is out of the preset transmit frequency.
1. Open the “User Band Edge” screen.
2. Touch the band edge you want to insert a new
band edge above for 1 second.
(Example: 1: 3.500.000–3.999.999 MHz)
L The new band edge will be inserted above the
selected band edge.
7. Touch [ENT] to save the entered upper band edge
frequency.
• The entered band edge is saved and returns to the
previous screen.
Resetting all band edges to presets
The steps below will reset all the band edges to their
initial settings. All entered settings will be deleted.
1. Open the “User Band Edge” screen.
2. Touch any band edge for 1 second.
3. Touch “Insert.”
4. Enter the lower band edge frequency.
(Example: 1.85)
5. Touch [ENT] to save the entered lower band edge
frequency.
6. Enter the upper band edge frequency. (Example: .95)
“User Band Edge” screen
3. Touch “Default.”
• Displays “Reset All Edges?”
4. Touch [YES].
• All the band edges reset to the initial settings.
“User Band Edge” screen
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-10
RF gain and SQL level
Rotate
AF RF/SQL
(outer) to adjust the RF gain and
SQL level.
By default, rotating to left (when set to the 12 o’clock
position) adjusts the RF gain, and rotating to right
adjusts the squelch level as described below.
RF gain
Adjust the RF gain to decrease the noise received
from a nearby strong station.
• Rotate counterclockwise to reduce the RF gain, which
reduces the receive sensitivity. “RFG” appears when
AF RF/SQL
is set to the counterclockwise from the 11 o’clock
position. “RFG” indicates that the RF gain is reduced.
L If a strong signal is received and “OVF” (Overow)
appears, reduce the RF gain until “OVF” disappears.
SQL level
There are 2 types of SQL levels, depending on the
operating mode.
• Noise squelch
Rotate the
AF RF/SQL
(outer) until the noise just
disappears and the TX/RX indicator goes OFF.
• S-meter squelch
The S-meter squelch mutes the audio output from the
speaker or headphones when the received signal is
weaker than the specied S-meter squelch level.
Rotate the
AF RF/SQL
clockwise from the 12 o’clock
position to increase the S-meter threshold level.
L You can change the
AF RF/SQL
(outer) control type in
“RF/SQL Control.” (p. 12-4)
MENU
» SET > Function > RF/SQL Control
Noise squelch (FM mode)
Maximum RF gain
S-meter squelch
adjustable range
Maximum S-meter
squelch
Squelch is open
RF gain
adjustable range
Minimum RF gain
is displayed
Dial Lock function
The Dial Lock function prevents frequency changes
caused by accidently moving
MAIN DIAL
.
LThis function electronically locks the dial.
Hold down
Adjusting the transmit output
power
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating
frequency to make sure you do not cause interference to
other stations on the same frequency. It is good amateur
practice to listen rst, and then, even if nothing is heard,
ask if the frequency in use once or twice, before you start
operating.
D Adjusting the transmit output power
1. Set the operating mode to SSB, CW, RTTY or FM.
(p. 3-3)
(Example: USB)
2. Touch the meter to display the Po meter. (p. 3-11)
3. Open the Multi-function menu.
Lights red
Push
4. Push
TRANSMIT
or hold down [PTT].
• The Po meter level changes according
to your voice level in the SSB mode.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red and
is displayed.
5. Touch “RF POWER.”
6. Adjust the transmit output power to between 0 and
100%.
Po meter
Rotate
Push
• The Po meter displays the RF output power in a
percentage. It becomes the S-meter while receiving.
7. Push
TRANSMIT
or release [PTT].
• Returns to receive.
Hold down
SPEECH
for 1 second to turn the
Dial Lock function ON or OFF.
• “ ” is displayed while the function is ON.
• During Split Frequency operation, the Split
Lock function may be turned ON. (p. 12-6)
MENU
» SET > Function > Lock Function
Hold down
1. Push
TRANSMIT
or [PTT] to transmit.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red and is displayed
while transmitting.
2. Push
TRANSMIT
or release [PTT].
• Returns to receive.
Basic transmission
L Tune the antenna before you view the power meter
level on the meter. If the antenna is not tuned properly,
the meter will not reect the power level. (p. 11-2)
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-11
Adjusting the microphone gain
Adjust the microphone gain as described below.
1. Set the operating mode to SSB, AM or FM.
(p. 3-3)
2. Push
MULTI
to display the Multi-function menu.
3. Touch “MIC GAIN.”
Lights red
Meter display
D Meter display selection
You can display one of the 6 different transmit
parameters (Po, SWR, ALC, COMP, VD and ID) for
your convenience.
Touch the parameter to display one of the meters.
D Multi-function meter
You can display all the parameters simultaneously.
L The power amplier temperature (TEMP) meter is also
displayed on the Multi-function meter.
Hold down the parameter for 1 second to display the
Multi-function meter.
ALC meter
ALC zone
Multi-function meter
4. Push
TRANSMIT
or hold down
[PTT] on the microphone.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red and
is displayed.
5. Rotate
MULTI
to adjust the microphone gain.
6. Push
TRANSMIT
or release [PTT].
• Returns to receive
S: Displays the receiving signal strength level.
Po: Displays the relative RF output power.
SWR: Displays the SWR of the antenna at the
operating frequency.
ALC: Displays the ALC level. When the meter
movement shows the input signal level exceeds
the allowed level, the ALC limits the RF power.
In such cases, decrease the microphone gain
level.
COMP: Displays the compression level when the
speech compressor is used.
VD: Displays the drain voltage of the nal amplier
MOS-FETs.
ID: Displays the drain current of the nal amplier
MOS-FETs.
TEMP: Displays the temperature of the nal amplier
MOS-FETs.
InformationL
• In the SSB mode, touch the TX meter to select
the ALC meter and adjust until the meter reading
swings between 30 to 50% of the ALC scale.
• Hold the microphone 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches)
from your mouth, then speak at your normal voice
level.
• In the AM or FM mode, check the audio clarity with
another station, or use the Monitor function (p. 4-11).
Lights red
Displays the drain
voltage of the nal
amplier MOS-FETs.
Displays the temperature
of the nal amplier
MOS-FETs.
TX inhibit zone
3
BASIC OPERATION
3-12
About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only)
Operation on the 5 MHz frequency band is allowed
on 5 discrete frequencies and you must adhere to the
following:
• The USB, USB Data, PSK, and CW modes.
• Maximum of 100 watts ERP (Effective Radiated
Power)
• Maximum 2.8 kHz bandwidth
It is your responsibility to set all controls so that
transmission in this frequency band meets the
stringent conditions under which amateur operations
may use these frequencies.
TIP: We recommend that you save these
frequencies, modes and lter settings into memory
channels, for easy recall.
NOTE: To assist you in operating within the rules specied
by the FCC, transmission is illegal on any frequencies
other than the ve shown in the tables below.
For the USB and USB data modes:
The FCC species center frequencies on the 5 MHz
frequency band. However, the transceiver displays
carrier frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver
to 1.5 kHz below the specied FCC channel center
frequency.
Transceiver displayed
frequency
FCC channel center
frequency
5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz
5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz
5.35700 MHz 5.35850 MHz
5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz
5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz
For the CW mode:
The transceiver displays the center frequency.
Therefore, tune the transceiver to the specied FCC
channel frequency when you operate in the CW mode.
Transceiver displayed
frequency
FCC channel center
frequency
5.33200 MHz 5.33200 MHz
5.34800 MHz 5.34800 MHz
5.35850 MHz 5.35850 MHz
5.37300 MHz 5.37300 MHz
5.40500 MHz 5.40500 MHz
4-1
Section 4 RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
Convenient for receiving ......................................... 4-2
D All operating modes ........................................ 4-2
D SSB, CW, RTTY, and AM modes .................... 4-2
D SSB, AM and FM modes ................................ 4-2
D SSB-D, CW and RTTY modes ........................4-2
D CW mode ........................................................ 4-2
Convenient for transmitting..................................... 4-2
D SSB, AM and FM modes ................................ 4-2
D SSB mode ....................................................... 4-2
D CW mode ........................................................ 4-2
Preampliers........................................................... 4-3
Attenuator ............................................................... 4-3
RIT function ............................................................4-3
D RIT monitor function ........................................ 4-3
AGC function control .............................................. 4-4
D Selecting the AGC time constant
preset value .................................................... 4-4
D Setting the AGC time constant ........................ 4-4
Using the Twin PBT ................................................4-5
Selecting the IF lter ............................................... 4-6
Selecting the IF lter shape .................................... 4-6
IP Plus function .......................................................4-7
Noise Blanker ......................................................... 4-8
D Adjusting the NB level and time ...................... 4-8
Noise Reduction ..................................................... 4-9
D Adjusting the Noise Reduction level ............... 4-9
Notch Filter ............................................................. 4-9
D Auto Notch function ........................................ 4-9
D Manual Notch function .................................... 4-9
VOX function ........................................................ 4-10
D Adjusting the VOX function ........................... 4-10
D Turning ON the VOX function .......................4-10
∂TX function ......................................................... 4-11
D ∂TX monitor function .................................... 4-11
Monitor function .................................................... 4-11
Setting the Speech Compressor........................... 4-12
Split frequency operation ...................................... 4-13
D Using the Quick Split function ....................... 4-13
D Using the receive and transmit frequencies
set to VFO A and VFO B ..............................4-13
Split Lock function ................................................ 4-14
Setting the transmit lter width ............................. 4-14
Operating CW ....................................................... 4-14
D Setting the CW pitch control ......................... 4-14
D Setting the key speed ................................... 4-15
D About the Break-in function .......................... 4-15
D CW Auto Tuning function .............................. 4-16
D About the CW Reverse mode ....................... 4-16
D Electronic Keyer function .............................. 4-17
D Monitoring the CW side tone ........................ 4-17
D Sending from the Memory keyer (KEYER) ... 4-18
D Keyer memory edit menu (EDIT) ................. 4-19
D Contest number menu (001 SET) ................. 4-20
D Keyer set menu (CW-KEY SET) ................... 4-21
Operating RTTY (FSK) ............................................ 4-22
D About the RTTY reverse mode ........................ 4-22
D Twin Peak Filter ............................................... 4-22
D Functions on the RTTY DECODE screen ........ 4-23
D Setting the decoder threshold level ................. 4-23
D Transmitting an RTTY memory content ........... 4-24
D Editing an RTTY memory ................................. 4-25
D Turning ON the RTTY log ............................... 4-26
D Viewing the RTTY log contents ........................ 4-26
D About the RTTY decode log set mode ............. 4-27
D About the RTTY decode set mode ................... 4-28
FM repeater operation ............................................. 4-29
D Setting the repeater tone frequency ................ 4-29
D Checking the repeater input signal .................. 4-30
Tone squelch operation ........................................... 4-30
Data mode (AFSK) operation .................................. 4-31
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-2
Convenient for receiving
D All operating modes
Preampliers and Attenuator (p. 4-3)
Use one of the Preampliers when receiving weak
signals and use the Attenuator to prevent distortion
when receiving strong signals.
Notch Filter (p. 4-9)
Automatically attenuates beat tones, tuning signals,
and so on.
• In the SSB or AM mode:
Use the Auto notch or Manual notch.
• In the CW or RTTY mode:
Use the Manual notch.
• In the FM mode:
Use the Auto notch.
RX HPF/LPF (p. 12-3)
Sets the receive audio high-pass lter and low-pass
lter cutoff frequency in 100 Hz steps.
MENU
» SET > Tone Control > RX
D SSB, CW, RTTY, and AM modes
Noise Blanker (p. 4-8)
The Noise Blanker eliminates pulse-type noise.
Noise Reduction (p. 4-9)
The Noise Reduction function reduces random noise
components and enhances desired signals that are
buried in noise. The DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
does the random noise reduction.
AGC (p. 4-4)
The AGC (Auto Gain Control) controls the receiver
gain to produce a constant audio output level, even
when the received signal strength greatly varies.
Twin PBT (p. 4-5)
To reject interference, the Twin PBT (Passband Tuning)
electronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting
the IF frequency slightly outside of the IF lter passband.
D SSB, AM and FM modes
Receive Audio Tone Control (p. 12-3)
You can adjust the receive audio bass and treble.
MENU
» SET > Tone Control > RX
D SSB-D, CW and RTTY modes
1/4 function (p. 3-5)
The dial speed is reduced to 1⁄4 of the normal speed,
for ner tuning control.
D CW mode
Auto Tuning (p. 4-16)
The transceiver automatically tunes the desired signal
within the ±500 Hz range.
Convenient for transmitting
D SSB, AM and FM modes
VOX function (p. 4-10)
The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function
switches between transmit and receive with your
voice. This function provides hands-free operation.
Transmit Monitor (p. 4-11)
The Monitor function enables you to monitor your
transmit audio.
Audio Tone Control (p. 12-3)
You can adjust the transmit audio bass and treble.
MENU
» SET > Tone Control > TX
D SSB mode
Speech compressor (p. 4-12)
The speech compressor increases average RF output
power, improving signal strength and readability.
Transmitter Filter Width (p. 4-14)
You can select WIDE, MID, and NAR compression
bandwidths.
MENU
» SET > Tone Control > TX
D CW mode
Break-in function (p. 4-15)
You can use the Break-in function to automatically
switch the transceiver between transmit and receive
when keying. The IC-7300 is capable of Full Break-in
and Semi Break-in mode.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-3
Preampliers
The preamps amplify received signals in the receiver
front end to improve the signal-to-noise ratio and
sensitivity. A preamp is used when receiving weak
signals.
L Each band memorizes the Preamplier setting.
Push
P.AMP
ATT
(P.AMP).
L Each push changes between “P.AMP1,” “P.AMP2,” and
OFF (no icon).
Displayed when the preamp is ON.
(Example: P.AMP1)
P.AMP1
Wide dynamic range preamplier.
It is most effective for the HF low bands.
P.AMP2
High-gain preamplier.
It is most effective for the 50 MHz bands.
NOTE: When you use the preamp while receiving
strong signals, the signal may be distorted. In such
case, turn OFF the preamp.
Attenuator
The Attenuator prevents a desired signal from
becoming distorted when a very strong signal is near
the frequency, or when a very strong electric eld,
such as from a broadcasting station, is near your
location.
LEach band memorizes the Attenuator setting.
Hold down
P.AMP
ATT
(ATT) for 1 second to turn ON the
Attenuator.
LPushing
P.AMP
ATT
turns OFF the Attenuator (no icon).
Displayed when the Attenuator is ON
RIT frequency
(3 digits)
RIT function
The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function
compensates for differences in frequencies of other
stations.
The function shifts the receive frequency up to ±9.99
without shifting the transmit frequency.
1. Push
RIT
.
• The RIT function turns ON.
L When using the Fine Tuning function (p. 3-4), the RIT
frequency is displayed in 4 digits, instead of 3.
LPushing
RIT
again turns OFF the RIT function.
2. Set the RIT frequency to match the receiving
station’s frequency.
L You can reset the RIT frequency to “0.00” by holding
down
CLEAR
for 1 second.
L You can add the frequency shift to the operating
frequency by holding down
RIT
for 1 second.
3. After communicating, push
RIT
to turn the RIT
function OFF.
Set RIT
frequency.
Rotate
D RIT monitor function
When the RIT function is ON, you can directly monitor
the operating frequency by holding down
XFC
.
L While monitoring, the RIT function is temporarily OFF.
L While monitoring, the settings for the Noise Reduction,
Notch lter and Twin PBT are temporarily OFF.
While holding down
XFC
.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-4
AGC function control
The AGC (Automatic Gain Control) controls receiver
gain to produce a constant audio output level, even
when the received signal strength varies greatly.
D Selecting the AGC time constant
preset value
The transceiver has 3 preset AGC settings for all
modes except the FM mode. The time constants are
FAST, MID and SLOW.
1. Select the operating mode.
(Example: SSB)
2. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
3. Touch [AGC] to select the desired FAST, MID or
SLOW time constant.
LFor the FM mode, the FAST time constant is xed.
FUNCTION screen (SSB mode)
4. To close the FUNCTION screen,
EXIT
.
D Setting the AGC time constant
You can set the preset AGC time constant to a desired
value.
1. Select the operating mode.
(Example: SSB)
2. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
3. Touch [AGC] for 1 second.
• Opens the AGC (SSB) screen.
4. Touch either FAST, MID or SLOW to select the
desired AGC time constant.
(Example: MID)
FUNCTION screen (SSB mode)
5. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to set the time constant.
L The adjustable time constants are described in the
table below.
6. To close the AGC (SSB) screen, push
EXIT
.
• Selectable AGC Time constant (unit: seconds)
Mode Default Adjustable time constant
SSB
0.3
（FAST）
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 or 6.0
2.0
（MID）
6.0
（SLOW）
CW/RTTY
0.1
（FAST）
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 or 6.0
0.5
（MID）
1.2
（SLOW）
AM
3.0
（FAST）
OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0 or 8.0
5.0
（MID）
7.0
（SLOW）
FM 0.1
（FAST）
Fixed
AGC (SSB) screen (SSB mode)
You can
reset to the
default setting
by touching
this key for 1
second.
NOTE: When you are receiving weak signals, and a strong
signal is momentarily received, the AGC function quickly
reduces the receiver gain. When that signal disappears,
the transceiver may not receive the weak signal because
of the AGC action. In that case, select FAST, or touch
[AGC] for 1 second to open the AGC screen, and then
select OFF the time constant setting.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-5
Using the Twin PBT
SSB, CW, RTTY and AM modes
In general, the Twin PBT (Passband Tuning)
electronically narrows the IF passband width by
shifting the IF frequency to slightly outside of the IF
lter passband, to reject interference. The IC-7300
uses DSP for the PBT function.
You can narrow the IF passband width by rotating
both
TWIN PBT
CLR
inner (PBT1) and outer (PBT2) to
the opposite direction from each other.
L You can see the nearby signal using the Spectrum Scope
(Section 5).
1. Rotate
TWIN PBT
CLR
inner (PBT1) and outer
(PBT2) to the opposite direction from each other.
2. Touch the Filter icon for 1 second to display the
current passband width and shift frequency.
• Opens the FILTER screen.
Passband
width
Shift
value
FILTER (SSB) screen (while operating Twin PBT)
3. To close the FILTER screen, push
EXIT
.
NOTE: While rotating
TWIN PBT
CLR
, you may hear noise.
This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an
equipment malfunction.
PBT2
PBT1
PBT2
PBT1
PBT2
PBT1
PBT is OFF
Cutting
lower passband
Cutting both higher and
lower passbands
IF center frequency Interference Desired
signal
Passband
Passband
Interference Desired
signal
Interference
IF center frequency
Passband center frequency
SFT: Shift value
BW:
Passband width
PBT1
PBT2
InformationL
• Match both the
TWIN PBT
CLR
(inner) (PBT1) and
outer (PBT2) lters before operating the Twin PBT.
• Rejects interference of both higher and lower
passbands.
• If you rotate the control too much, the received
audio may not be heard because the passband
width is too narrow.
• Displays the passband width and shift value.
• A dot is displayed to the right of the passband width
when you rotate
TWIN PBT
CLR
.
• Hold down
TWIN PBT
CLR
for 1 second to clear the
PBT setting (the dot disappears).
• The PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB,
CW, and RTTY modes, and 200 Hz in the AM
mode. In this case, the center shift value changes
in 25 Hz steps in the SSB, CW, and RTTY modes,
and 100 Hz in the AM mode.
• Rotating both the inner and outer controls to the
same position shifts the IF left or right.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-6
Selecting the IF lter
The transceiver has 3 IF lter passband widths for each
mode, and you can select them on the FILTER screen.
You can set the IF lter to wide (FIL 1), mid (FIL 2) or
narrow (FIL 3).
1. Select the operating mode.
(Example: USB)
2. Touch the filter icon for 1 second.
• Opens the FILTER (SSB) screen.
3. Touch the filter icon more times to select FIL 1
(wide), FIL 2 (mid) or FIL 3 (narrow).
4. Touch [BW].
• Selects the passband width mode.
L When you change the passband width, the Twin PBT
setting value is reset to the center position.
5. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to adjust the passband width.
L You cannot change the passband width in the FM or
FM-D mode.
FILTER (SSB) screen (when FIL 2 is selected)
Passband width mode
Touch [DEF]
for 1 second to
reset to default.
Displayed when a band width less than 500 Hz
is selected in the SSB or CW mode.
6. Touch [BW ].
• Cancels the passband width mode.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to set the passband width for
other modes except for the FM and FM-D.
8. To close the FILTER screen, push
EXIT
.
TIP: When you set the IF lter to FIL2 or FIL3 in the FM
mode, the transceiver will transmit in the FM narrow mode.
Mode IF lter Selectable range (steps)
SSB
FIL 1 (3.0 kHz)
50Hz to 500Hz (50 Hz)/
600Hz to 3.6kHz (100 Hz)
FIL 2 (2.4 kHz)
FIL 3 (1.8 kHz)
SSB-D
CW
FIL 1 (1.2 kHz)
50Hz to 500Hz (50 Hz)/
600Hz to 3.6kHz (100 Hz)
FIL 2 (500 Hz)
FIL 3 (250 Hz)
RTTY
FIL 1 (2.4 kHz)
50Hz to 500Hz (50 Hz)
600Hz to 2.7kHz (100 Hz)
FIL 2 (500 Hz)
FIL 3 (250 Hz)
AM
AM-D
FIL 1 (9.0 kHz)
200Hz to 10.0kH (200 Hz)FIL 2 (6.0 kHz)
FIL 3 (3.0 kHz)
FM
FM-D
FIL 1 (15 kHz)
FixedFIL 2 (10 kHz)
FIL 3 (7.0 kHz)
Selecting the IF lter shape
You can independently set the DSP lter shape for
operating modes to soft or sharp.
1. Set the operating mode to SSB, SSB-D or CW.
(Example: USB)
2. Touch the filter icon for 1 second.
• Opens the FILTER screen.
3. Touch the filter icon several times to select FIL1
(wide), FIL2 (mid) or FIL3 (narrow).
4. Touch [SHARP] or [SOFT].
5. To close the FILTER screen, push
EXIT
.
When [SOFT] is selected
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-7
IP Plus function
The IP Plus function improves the Intermodulation
Distortion (IMD) quality by exerting the direct sampling
system performance.
This function optimizes the Analog/Digital Converter
(ADC) against the distortion when you receive a
strong input signal. It also improves the Third-order
Intercept Point (IP3) while minimizing the reduction of
the receive sensitivity.
1. Push
FUNCTION
.
• The FUNCTION screen is displayed.
2. Touch [IP+].
LTouch [IP+] to turn the IP Plus function ON or OFF.
L Select ON to prioritize the IP quality, and select OFF
to prioritize the receive sensitivity.
3. To close the FUNCTION screen, push
EXIT
.
• “IP+” is displayed when ON is selected.
Displayed
• SHARP
This selection is to emphasize the passband width of
the lter. The lter has an almost ideal shape factor.
Signals of the out of passband are extremely ltered
out and it gives you better audio quality.
• SOFT
The lter shoulders are roundly formed as in analog
lters. This decreases noise components in the
high and low frequencies of the lter passband
and increases the S/N of the target signal. These
characteristics play an effective role in picking up
very weak signals in the 50 MHz band, for example.
The shape factor is kept, and the sharpness of the
bandpass is excellent.
Selecting the IF lter shape (Continued)
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-8
Noise Blanker
The Noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such
as the noise from car ignitions.
The Noise blanker cannot be used in the FM mode.
Push
NB
to turn the Noise Blanker ON or OFF.
Displayed
NOTE: When using the Noise Blanker, received signals
may be distorted if they are excessively strong or the noise
is other than a pulse type. In that case, turn OFF the Noise
Blanker, or shallow the DEPTH on the NB menu.
See the description below for details.
D Adjusting the NB level and time
To deal with various type of noise, you can adjust the
attenuation level and noise width in the NB menu.
1. Hold down
NB
for 1 second.
• Turns ON the Noise Blanker and opens the NB menu.
2. Touch the adjusting item.
(Example: DEPTH)
3. Adjust the level.
(Example: 8)
Rotate
Push
LEVEL (Default: 50%)
Adjust the level where the Noise Blanker activates
between 0 and 100%.
DEPTH (Default: 8)
Adjust the noise attenuation level to between 1 and
10.
WIDTH (Default: 50)
Adjust the blanking duration time to between 1 and
100.
Noise Blanker OFF Noise Blanker ON
Pulse-type
noise
Receive
signal
Noise Blanker ON
(Not enough DEPTH)
Noise Blanker ON
(WIDTH set too long)
NB WIDTH
Receive
signal
LEVEL
Receive
signal
Receive
signal
Pulse-type
noise remains
Receive signal is
eliminated along with
pulse-type noise
Pulse-type
noise eliminated
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-9
Noise Reduction
The Noise Reduction function reduces random noise
components and enhances desired signals that are
buried in noise. The Noise Reduction function uses
the DSP circuit.
Push
NR
to turn the Noise Reduction function ON or
OFF.
Displayed
D Adjusting the Noise Reduction level
Adjust the Noise Reduction level to where noise is
reduced and the received signal is not distorted.
1. Hold down
NR
for 1 second.
• Turns ON the Noise Reduction function and opens the
NR menu.
2. Adjust the Noise Reduction level to between 0
and 15.
L Adjust to a higher level to increase the reduction
level, and a lower level to decrease it.
Rotate
Push
Noise Reduction OFF
NR level 0
Noise Reduction ON
NR level 4
Noise components Desired signal (CW)
Notch Filter
The IC-7300 has Auto Notch and Manual Notch
functions.
Auto Notch: Used in the SSB, AM and FM modes.
Manual Notch: Used in the SSB, CW, RTTY and AM
modes.
D Auto Notch function
Auto Notch automatically lters out beat tones, tuning
signals and so on.
Push
NOTCH
until “AN (Auto Notch)” is displayed.
L Pushing
NOTCH
changes between “AN (Auto Notch),”
“MN (Manual Notch)” and OFF.
Displayed
D Manual Notch function
The Manual Notch lters out beat tones, tuning signals
and so on by adjusting a frequency in the NOTCH
menu.
1. Hold down
NOTCH
for 1 second to display the
NOTCH menu.
• The Manual Notch is automatically selected and “MN”
is displayed.
L Pushing [WIDTH] sets the Manual Notch filter width
to “WIDE,” “MID” or “NAR.”
2. Slowly adjust the POSITION to manually
attenuate the frequency.
NOTE: While adjusting, noise may be heard.
This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate
an equipment malfunction.
Rotate
Push
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-10
VOX function
D Turning ON the VOX function
1. Set the operating mode to SSB, AM or FM.
(Example: USB)
2. Push
VOX/BK-IN
to turn ON the VOX function.
L Pushing
VOX/BK-IN
again turns OFF the VOX
function.
Displayed
The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function
switches between transmit and receive with your
voice. This function enables a hands-free operation.
D Adjusting the VOX function
Before using the VOX function, adjust the following
items.
• VOX GAIN
• ANTI VOX
• DELAY
• VOICE DELAY
1. Hold down
VOX/BK-IN
for 1 second.
• Opens the VOX menu.
2. Touch the adjusting item.
(Example: ANTI VOX)
3. Adjust the selected item.
L Adjust to the point where the transceiver does not
switch to transmit due to the sound from the speaker
or other devices.
L Touching VOICE DELAY selects “SHORT,” “MID,”
“LONG” or “OFF.”
VOX GAIN (Default: 50%)
Adjust the transmit/receive switching threshold level
to between 0% and 100% for VOX operation. Higher
values make the VOX function more sensitive to your
voice.
ANTI VOX (Default: 50%)
Adjust the ANTI VOX level to between 0% and 100%
to prevent unwanted VOX activation from the speaker
or other sounds. Higher values make the VOX function
less sensitive.
DELAY (Default: 0.2s)
Adjust the DELAY to between 0 and 2.0 seconds, for
a convenient interval for normal pauses in speech
before returning to receive.
VOICE DELAY (Default: OFF)
Set the VOICE DELAY to prevent cutting off your rst
word or words when switching to transmit.
Select “SHORT,” “MID,” “LONG” or OFF.
Rotate
Push
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-11
∂TX function
The ∂TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to
±9.99 kHz without shifting the receive frequency.
1. Push
TX
.
• The ∂TX function turns ON.
LPushing
TX
turns the ∂TX function ON or OFF.
L While using the Fine Tuning function (p. 3-4), the ∂TX
frequency is displayed in 4 digits, instead of 3.
2. Set the ∂TX frequency to match the receiving
station’s frequency.
∂TX frequency
L To reset the ∂TX frequency to “0.00,” hold down
CLEAR
for 1 second.
L You can add the frequency shift to the operating
frequency by holding down
TX
for 1 second.
3. After communicating, push
TX
to turn the ∂TX
function OFF.
D ∂TX monitor function
When the ∂TX function is ON, you can directly monitor
the operating frequency by holding down
XFC
.
Rotate
Set ∂TX
frequency.
While holding down
XFC
.
Monitor function
The Monitor function enables you to monitor your
transmit audio. Use this function to check the
voice characteristics while adjusting transmit audio
parameters.
L You can hear the CW sidetone regardless of the Monitor
function setting.
1. Select the mode that you want to monitor.
(Example: USB)
2. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
3. Touch [MONI] to turn ON the Monitor function.
LTouching [MONI] turns the Monitor function ON or OFF.
FUNCTION screen (USB mode)
4. Touch [MONI] for 1 second.
5. Adjust MONITOR to the clearest audio output
between 0% and 100%, while speaking at your
normal voice level.
NOTE: When using the VOICE DELAY (p. 4-10), turn OFF
the Monitor function. Otherwise the transmitted audio will
echo.
Rotate
Push
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-12
Setting the Speech Compressor
SSB mode
The Speech Compressor increases the average RF
output power, improving readability at the receiving
station. This function compresses the transmitter
audio input to increase the average audio output level.
L The function is effective for long-distance communication,
or when propagation conditions are poor.
1. Select the SSB mode.
(Example: USB)
2. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
3. Be sure that the Speech Compressor is OFF.
L If the Speech Compressor is ON, touch [COMP] to
turn it OFF.
FUNCTION screen (USB mode)
OFF
4. Touch
EXIT
to close the FUNCTION screen.
5. Touch the Multi-function meter to display the ALC
meter.
L Touching the Multi-function meter sets the meter to
Po, SWR, ALC, COMP, V
D or ID.
6. Adjust the MIC GAIN (p. 3-11) to where the ALC
meter reads within the 30 to 50% range of the
ALC zone.
7. Touch the Multi-function meter again to display
the COMP meter.
8. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
9. Touch [COMP] to turn it ON.
10. Touch [COMP] for 1 second.
11. While speaking into the microphone at your
normal voice level, adjust the Speech Compressor
level to where the COMP meter reads within the
COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range).
L When the COMP meter peaks exceed the COMP
zone, your transmitted voice may be distorted.
COMP zone
Speech Compressor is ON
Rotate
ALC meter
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-13
Split frequency operation
Split frequency operation enables you to transmit
and receive on different frequencies in the same or
different bands.
There are 2 ways to use the Split frequency operation.
• Use the Quick Split function
• Use the receive and transmit frequencies set to VFO
A and VFO B.
Another station My station
Transmit frequency
USB mode
21.29000 MHz
VFO A
Receive frequency
Receive frequency
USB mode
21.31000 MHz
VFO B
Transmit frequency
D Using the Quick Split function
The Quick Split function enables you to automatically
equalize the frequency and mode of VFOs to the
displayed VFO, and activate the Split function.
1. Set VFO A’s receive frequency and operating
mode.
(Example: 21.29000 MHz in the USB mode)
2. Hold down
SPLIT
for 1 second.
• The Quick Split function is turned ON and the VFO A
settings are set to VFO B.
• The VFO B frequncy is displayed in the bottom right
corner of the main screen.
Displayed
VFO B
frequency is
displayed
3. While holding down
XFC
, set the operating
frequency offset between transmit and receive.
The offset between transmit and receive
while holding down
XFC
.
VFO B
D Using the receive and transmit
frequencies set to VFO A and VFO B
1. Set VFO A’s receive frequency and operating
mode.
(Example: 21.29000 MHz in the USB mode)
2. Push
A/B
to select VFO B, and then set the receive
frequency and the operating mode.
(Example: 21.31000 MHz in the USB mode)
3. Push
SPLIT
to turn ON the Split function.
L Pushing
SPLIT
turns the Split function ON or OFF.
Displayed
VFO A
frequency is
displayed
4. Push
A/B
to return to VFO A.
LThe Split frequency operation is ready.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-14
Split Lock function
The Split Lock function is convenient for changing
only the transmit frequency but not changing the
receive frequency.
1. Turn ON the Split Lock function.
MENU
» SET > Function > SPLIT > SPLIT LOCK
2. Turn ON the Split function.
3. Hold down
SPEECH
for 1 second to turn ON the Dial
Lock function.
4. While holding down
XFC
, set the transmit
frequency.
Displayed
when Dial
Lock is ON.
Setting the transmit lter width
You can select the transmit lter width for the SSB
mode to WIDE (wide), MID (middle) or NAR (narrow).
1. Set the operating mode to USB or LSB.
2. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
3. Touch [TBW ].
L Touching [TBW] sets the lter width to WIDE, MID or
NAR.
L The transmit lter widths are set to the following
values by default.
• WIDE: 100 Hz to 2900 Hz
• MID: 300 Hz to 2700 Hz
• NAR: 500 Hz to 2500 Hz
You can change the lter width values in the
following settings. (p. 12-3)
MENU
»
SET > Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (WIDE)
MENU
»
SET > Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (MID)
MENU
»
SET > Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (NAR)
Operating CW
D Setting the CW pitch control
You can set the received CW audio pitch and the CW
side tone to suit your preference without changing the
operating frequency.
1. Select the CW mode.
2. Display the Multi-function menu.
3. Touch [CW PITCH].
4. Set the CW pitch to between 300 and 900 Hz
Push
Rotate
Push
FUNCTION screen (SSB mode)
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-15
Operating CW (Continued)
D Setting the key speed
You can set the key speed of the internal electric
keyer.
1. Select the CW mode.
2. Display the Multi-function menu.
3. Touch [KEY SPEED].
4. Set the key speed to between 6 and 48 Words Per
Minute (WPM).
Rotate
Push
Push
D About the Break-in function
Use the Break-in function in the CW mode to
automatically switch between transmit and receive
when keying. The IC-7300 is capable of Semi Break-in
and Full break-in modes.
Semi Break-in
Semi Break-in mode
In the Semi Break-in mode, the transceiver transmits
when keying, and then automatically returns to receive
after a preset time after you stop keying.
1. Select the CW mode.
2. Push
VOX/BK-IN
to display “BKIN.”
L Pushing
VOX/BK-IN
selects “BKIN (Semi Break-in),”
“F-BKIN (Full Break-in)” or OFF (no indication).
Rotate
3. To adjust the Break-in delay time, hold down
VOX/BK-IN
for 1 second.
• Opens the BKIN menu.
4. Set to where the transceiver does not return to
receive while keying.
L When you are using a paddle, push
MULTI
to display
the Multi-function menu, and then adjust the KEY
SPEED while operating the paddle.
TIP: The key type is set to “Paddle” by default. You can
select the keyer type on the CW-KEY SET screen.
(p. 4-21)
5. To close the BKIN menu, push
EXIT
.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-16
Operating CW
D CW Auto Tuning function
You can tune in a CW signal you are receiving using
the Auto Tuning function. You can automatically tune
by pushing
AUTO
TUNE
. This function is active in only the
CW mode.
L While using the RIT, the RIT frequency is automatically
tuned by this function.
Displayed
while tuning
NOTE: When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal
with interference, the Auto Tuning function may tune the
receiver to an undesired signal, or may not start to tune. In
such case, a warning beep sounds.
D About the CW Reverse mode
The CW-R (CW Reverse) mode reverses the receive
Beat Frequency Oscillator (BFO) to receive CW
signals.
Use when interfering signals are near the desired
signal and you want to use the CW-R to reduce
interference.
CW mode (LSB side) CW-R mode (USB side)
BFO BFO
Interference Desired
signal
Interference Desired
signal
TIP: Reversing the carrier point
The carrier point of the CW mode is LSB by default.
You can change it to USB in the “CW Normal Side” item of
the OTHERS set screen. (p. 12-6)
MENU
» SET > Function > CW Normal Side
L When this setting is set to “USB,” the CW and CW-R
modes are reversed.
D About the Break-in function (Continued)
Full Break-in mode
In the Full Break-in mode, the transceiver
automatically transmits while keying down, and then
immediately returns to receive after keying up.
1. Select the CW mode.
2. Push
VOX/BK-IN
until “F-BKIN” is displayed.
L Pushing
VOX/BK-IN
selects “BKIN (Semi Break-in),”
“F-BKIN (Full Break-in)” or OFF (no indication).
Full Break-in
3. Using a straight key or paddle.
L In the Full break-in mode, the transceiver automatically
returns to receive without a preset break-in delay time
after you stop keying. The transceiver receives while
keying up.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-17
Operating CW (Continued)
EDIT
D Electronic Keyer function
You can set the Memory Keyer function settings,
paddle polarity settings, and so on of the Electronic
Keyer.
1. Open the KEYER screen in the CW mode.
MENU
» KEYER
L You can select [KEYER] on the MENU screen only in
the CW mode.
2. Touch [EDIT/SET].
• Opens the EDIT/SET screen.
KEYER screen
3. Select the desired item to set.
Keyer memory edit menu (p. 4-19)
You can edit the Keyer memories.
001 SET
CW-KEY SET
EXIT
Contest number menu (p. 4-20)
You can set the number style, count
up trigger, and present number.
Key set menu (p. 4-21)
You can set the memory keyer
repeat time, dot/dash ratio, paddle
polarity, key type, and so on.
D Monitoring the CW side tone
When the transceiver is in standby and the Break-In
function is OFF, you can listen to the CW side tone
without actually transmitting.
InformationL
• This enables you to match your transmit frequency
exactly to another station’s by matching the audio tone.
• You can also use the CW side tone (make sure the
Break-in function is OFF (p. 4-15)) to practice CW
sending.
• You can adjust the CW side tone level in “Side Tone
Level.”
MENU
» KEYER > EDIT/SET > CW-KEY SET >
Side Tone Level
EDIT/SET screen
Rotate
Push
4. To close the KEYER screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-18
Operating CW (Continued)
D Sending from the Memory keyer (KEYER)
You can send preset characters using the Memory
keyer function.
Sending
1. Open the KEYER screen in the CW mode.
MENU
» KEYER
2. Push
TRANSMIT
.
• The TX status indicator lights red.
L If you want to automatically switch between transmit
and receive, turn the Break-in function ON. (p. 4-15)
3. Touch a desired memory keyer between [M1] and
[M4].
• The touched keyer contents are sent.
4. To stop sending, push
EXIT
.
KEYER screen while sending
(Example: sending M1)
Sending
contents
KEYER screen while sending
(Example: Repeatedly sending M1)
Displayed
Key Action
M1~M8
Touch Sends the Memory keyer contents
Touch for
1 second
is displayed and repeatedly
sends the Memory keyer contents.
L You can change the repeat
interval setting in “Keyer Repeat
Time” in the CW-KEY SET menu.
(p. 4-21)
–1
001
Reduces the contest number counter by 1 (001).
L You can change or reset the number in
“Present Number” in the KEYER 001 menu.
(p. 4-21)
EDIT/SET
Touch to display the EDIT/SET screen.
Count up trigger
The count up trigger enables the serial number to be
automatically increased after each complete serial
number exchange is sent. (Default: M2)
Present number counter
Count up trigger icon
L is displayed on the Memory keyer set to the count up
trigger.
L You can change the count up trigger setting in the KEYER
001 menu. (Default: M2) (p. 4-20)
Preset Memory keyer contents
Memory keyer
Contents
M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST
M2 UR 5NN 001 BK
M3 CFM TU
M4 QRZ?
L “001” is the CW contest number.
L If you want to set the Count up trigger to different keyer,
delete “*” (asterisk) from the Memory keyer M2. See
“Keyer memory edit menu (EDIT)” (p. 4-19) for details.
TIP: When you are using an external keypad, you can
send the preset contents without opening the KEYER
screen. See page 18-3 for details.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-19
Operating CW (Continued)
D Keyer memory edit menu (EDIT)
Edit the Memory keyer contents in the EDIT menu.
L You can use up to a total of 8 Memory keyers (M1 to M8),
and you can enter up to 70 characters in each memory.
Editing
(Example: Entering “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST” to M3)
1. Open the KEYER MEMORY screen in the CW
mode.
MENU
» KEYER > EDIT/SET > EDIT
2. Touch “CFM TU” for 1 second.
3. Touch “Edit.”
4. Touch [CLR] until the preset contents are cleared.
5. Enter
“QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST,” and then touch
[ENT] to save.
LSee “Keyboard entering and editing” (p. 1-8) for details.
6. To close the KEYER screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
Selectable characters
Alfabets ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Symbols / ? ^ . , @ *
Numbers 1234567890
About the symbols
• Enter “^” to send a string of characters with no
intercharacter space. Put “^” before a text string such as
^AR, and the string “ar” is sent with no space.
• Enter “*” (asterisk) to insert the CW contest number. The
number automatically advances by 1. You can use this for
only 1 Memory keyer at a time. “*” is used in Memory keyer
M2 by default.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-20
Operating CW (Continued)
D Contest number menu (001 SET)
You can set the number style, count up trigger and
preset number.
Setting
1. Open the KEYER 001 menu in the CW mode.
MENU
» KEYER > EDIT/SET > 001 SET
2. Select the setting item.
(Example: Number Style)
3. Select the desired setting option.
Rotate
Push
KEYER 001 menu
• Returns to the KEYER 001 menu.
4. To close the “Number Style” screen, push
EXIT
several times.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays the
Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
Number Style (Default: Normal)
Set the numbering system used for contest (serial)
numbers— normal or short morse numbers.
• Select Normal, 190→ANO, 190→ANT, 90→NO or 90→NT.
Count Up Trigger (Default: Normal)
Select which of the 8 memories will contain the
contest serial number exchange.
• Select between M1 and M8.
Present Number (Default: 001)
Set the current number for the Count Up Trigger.
• Set to between 001 and 9999.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-21
Operating CW (Continued)
D Keyer set menu (CW-KEY SET)
In this menu, you can set the memory keyer repeat
time, dash weight, paddle specications, key type,
and so on.
Setting example
1. Open the CW-KEY SET menu in the CW mode.
MENU
» KEYER > EDIT/SET > CW-KEY SET
2. Select the setting item.
(Example: Side Tone Level)
3. Adjust the Side Tone Level.
(Example: 80%)
Rotate
Push
CW-KEY SET menu
4. To close the KEYER screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays the
Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
Side Tone Level (Default: 50%)
Adjust the CW side tone output level.
• Adjust to between 0 and 100%.
Side Tone Level Limit (Default: ON)
Turn the CW side tone level limit ON or OFF. This
disables the CW side tone when you rotate
AF RF/SQL
(inner) above the side tone level.
Keyer Repeat time (Default: 2sec)
Set the time between Memory keyer transmissions.
• Set to between 1 and 60 seconds.
Dot/Dash Ratio (Default: 1:1:3.0)
Set the dot/dash ratio.
• Set to between 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 in 0.1 steps.
Keying weight example: Morse code “K”
11 3
112.8∼4.5
Default: 1:1:3
Setting range
1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5
DashDashDot
Setting range
Space
TX
RX
0
Key action
TX output
power
Set TX output power
Rise time
Time
Rise Time (Default: 4ms)
Set the rise time of the transmitted CW envelope.
• Set to 2, 4, 6 or 8 milliseconds.
Paddle Polarity (Default: Normal)
Set the paddle dot-dash polarity to Normal or
Reverse.
• Normal: Right = dash, Left = dot
• Reverse: Right = dot, Left = dash
Key Type (Default: ELEC-KEY)
Set the key type for the [KEY] connector on the rear
panel.
• Set to Straight, Bug or Paddle.
MIC Up/Down Keyer (Default: OFF)
Set the microphone [UP]/[DN] keys to use as a CW
key.
• ON: Use the [UP]/[DN] keys as a CW key.
• OFF: Do not use the [UP]/[DN] keys as a CW key.
LThe [UP]/[DN] keys do not work as a “squeeze key.”
L When “ON” is selected, you cannot change the frequency
and the Memory channels using the [UP]/[DN] keys.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-22
Operating RTTY (FSK)
With the built-in RTTY decoder and the contents set
in the RTTY TX memory, you can operate the basic
RTTY operation without using an external device.
L If you are using PSK software, refer to the software manual.
1. Select the RTTY mode.
2. Open the RTTY DECODE screen.
MENU
» DECODE
L You can select [DECODE] on the MENU screen only
while in the RTTY mode.
RTTY DECODE screen
3. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to tune the desired signal.
FFT scope
Tuning indicator
4. Transmit the RTTY memory.
• The TX status indicator lights red and the Po meter
swings.
Contents being transmitted are displayed.
(Example: transmitting the RT1’s TX memory)
Lights red Lights red
D About the RTTY reverse mode
If you are receiving an RTTY signal but cannot decode
correctly, try in the RTTY-R (reverse) mode.
Select the RTTY-R mode by touching [RTTY] on the
MODE screen.
L Touching [RTTY] toggles between the RTTY mode and
the RTTY-R mode.
BFOBFO
170 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz2125 Hz
RTTY mode Normal RTTY-R mode
Space Mark Space Mark
D Twin Peak Filter
The Twin Peak Filter (TPF) changes the audio
frequency response by boosting the mark and space
frequencies for better reception of RTTY signals, or for
decoding the external AF output on a PC.
1. While in the RTTY mode, display the Multi-
function menu.
Push
2. Touch [TPF].
LTouching [TPF] turns the function ON or OFF.
3. To close the Multi-function menu, push
EXIT
.
Lights while the TPF is ON
NOTE: When you are using the Twin Peak Filter, the
received audio output may increase. This is not a
malfunction.
InformationL
• Aim for a symmetrical wave form, and be sure the
peak points align with the mark (2125 Hz) and shift
(170 Hz) frequency lines in the FFT scope.
• The S-meter displays the received signal strength,
when a signal is received.
• If you cannot decode correctly, try in the RTTY-R
mode.
• Tune to where both “◄” and “►” are displayed in
the tuning indicator.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-23
Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)
D Functions on the RTTY DECODE screen
Open the RTTY DECODE screen in the RTTY mode.
MENU
» DECODE
When tuned to an RTTY signal, the decoded
characters are displayed.
RTTY DECODE screen
Normal
screen
RTTY DECODE screen
Expanded
screen
TIP: Touching [EXPD/SET] toggles between the Normal
screen and Expanded screen.
Key Action
<1> Selects the function menu.
<2> Selects the function menu.
HOLD
Turns the Hold function ON or OFF.
L “
HOLD
” is displayed, and the RTTY
DECODE screen stops.
CLR
Touch for 1 second to clear the displayed
characters.
• While the Hold function is ON, this clears the
characters and cancels the Hold function.
TX MEM Opens the RTTY MEMORY screen.
LOG
Opens the RTTY DECODE LOG screen.
• Starts/Stops logging, selects the le type or
the time stamp.
LOG VIEW
Opens the RTTY DECODE LOG VIEW
screen.
• You can check the saved RTTY log les.
ADJ
Opens the THRESHOLD screen.
• You can set the threshold level.
EXPD/SET
Touch
Selects the Expanded or Normal
screen.
Touch for
1 second
Opens the RTTY DECODE SET
screen.
D Setting the decoder threshold level
Adjusting the RTTY decoder threshold level prevents
characters been decoded from noise, even though
you have not received an RTTY signal.
1. Open the RTTY DECODE screen.
MENU
» DECODE
2. Touch [<1>].
RTTY DECODE screen
• The function menu <2> is displayed.
3. Touch [ADJ].
• The THRESHOLD setting screen is displayed.
4. Checking the RTTY DECODE, rotate
MAIN DIAL
to adjust the threshold level to where the
characters are not displayed from noise.
L If the threshold level adjusted is too high, you cannot
receive weak signals.
L Touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default
setting.
5. To close the THRESHOLD setting screen, touch
[ADJ].
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-24
Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)
D Transmitting an RTTY memory content
You can transmit the preset characters on the RTTY
MEMORY screen.
L You can edit the characters by touching [EDIT] on the
RTTY MEMORY screen.
1. Open the RTTY DECODE screen in the RTTY
mode.
MENU
» DECODE
2. Touch [TX MEM].
RTTY DECODE screen
• Opens the RTTY MEMORY screen.
3. Touch the desired RTTY memory between [RT1]
and [RT8] to transmit.
(Example: RT1)
L To cancel the transmission and to return to the RTTY
DECODE screen, push
EXIT
.
RTTY MEMORY screen
Transmitting contents are displayed.
(Example: RT1)
Lights red Lights red
Memory Preset characters by default
RT1
↵ DE ICOM ICOM K ↵
RT2
↵ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K ↵
RT3
↵ QSL UR 599–599 BK ↵
RT4
↵ QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599 BK ↵
RT5
↵ 73 GL SK ↵
RT6
↵ CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K ↵
RT7
↵ MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7300 & ANTENNA
IS A 3–ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI. ↵
RT8
↵ MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK
UNIT & DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–7300. ↵
TIP: When an external keypad is connected to the [MIC]
jack, you can transmit the RTTY memories using the
external keypad. See page 18-3 for details.
• The TX status indicator lights red and the Po meter
swings.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-25
Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)
D Editing an RTTY memory
You can edit the characters in the RTTY memories.
You can save and transmit 8 RTTY memories for
often-used RTTY messages.
Each RTTY memory contains up to 70 characters.
1. Open the RTTY MEMORY screen.
MENU
» DECODE > TX MEM > EDIT
2. Touch the memory for 1 second.
(Example: RT3)
RTTY MEMORY screen
3. Touch “Edit.”
4. Touch [CLR] until the characters are cleared.
QUICK MENU screen
5. Enter the desired characters, and then touch
[ENT] to save.
LSee “Keyboard entering and editing” (p. 1-8) for details.
6. To close the RTTY DECODE screen, push
EXIT
several times.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-26
D Turning ON the RTTY log
Turn ON the RTTY log to save your TX and RX RTTY
operating record onto an SD card (user supplied).
1. Insert an SD card into the IC-7300. (p. 8-2)
2. Open the RTTY DECODE LOG screen in the
RTTY mode.
MENU
» DECODE > <1> > LOG
3. Select “Decode Log.”
Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)
Rotate
Push
4. Select “ON.”
5. Push
EXIT
.
• “●” is displayed on the RTTY DECODE screen when
the RTTY log is ON.
6. To turn OFF the RTTY log, select “OFF” in step 4.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays the
Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
D Viewing the RTTY log contents
You can check the RTTY log contents.
1. Insert an SD card with the desired log. (p. 8-2)
2. Open the RTTY DECODE LOG VIEW screen in
the RTTY mode.
MENU
» DECODE > <1> > LOG VIEW
3. Select the desired log file to view.
L The le with “●” is logging. You cannot check this
log’s contents.
Rotate
Push
RTTY DECODE LOG VIEW screen
Example of a log saved in the text format.
4. To close the RTTY DECODE screen, push
EXIT
several times.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-27
Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)
D About the RTTY decode log set mode
This mode is for the log le type, time stamp setting,
and other RTTY settings.
1. Open the RTTY DECODE LOG screen in the
RTTY mode.
MENU
» DECODE > <2> > LOG
2. Select “Log Set.”
Rotate
Push
3. Select the desired item.
(Example: File Type)
4. Select the desired setting, item or value.
(Example: HTML)
5. To close the RTTY DECODE screen, push
EXIT
several times.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays the
Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
File Type (Default: Text)
Select the le type to save a log onto an SD card to
Text or HTML.
L You cannot change the le type while logging.
Time Stamp (Default: ON)
Select whether or not to add the time stamp (date,
transmission time and reception time) in the log.
• ON: Adds the time stamp in the log
• OFF: Does not add the time stamp
Time Stamp (Time) (Default: Local)
Select whether to save the log with the local time or
with the UTC time.
Time Stamp (Frequency) (Default: ON)
Select whether or not to add the frequency in the log.
• ON: Adds the frequency
• OFF: Does not add the frequency
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-28
Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)
D About the RTTY decode set mode
This set mode is for the FFT scope setting, USOS
function, and so on.
1. Open the RTTY DECODE screen in the RTTY
mode.
MENU
» DECODE
2. Touch [EXPD/SET] for 1 second.
• Opens the RTTY DECODE SET screen.
RTTY DECODE screen
3. Select the desired item to set
(Example: FFT Scope Averaging)
4. Select the desired option or setting.
(Example: 2)
RTTY DECODE SET screen
Rotate
Push
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays the
Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
5. To close the RTTY DECODE screen, push
EXIT
several times.
FFT Scope Averaging (Default: OFF)
Set the FFT scope waveform averaging function to
between 2 and 4 or to OFF.
L Use the default or smaller FFT scope waveform number
for tuning.
FFT Scope Waveform Color
(Default: R: 51, G: 153, B: 255)
Set the color of the FFT scope waveform.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio to
between 0 and 255.
LThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.
Decode USOS (Default: ON)
Turn the letter code decoding capability ON or OFF
after receiving a “space.”
LUSOS stands for UnShift On Space function.
• ON: Decodes as a letter code.
• OFF: Decodes as a character code.
Decode New Line Code
(Default: CR, LF, CR+LF)
Select the internal RTTY decoder new line code.
L CR stands for Carriage Return, and LF stands for Line
Feed.
• CR,LF,CR+LF: Makes a new line with any codes.
• CR+LF: Makes a new line with only CR+LF code.
TX USOS (Default: ON)
Explicitly inserts the FIGS character, even though it is
not required by the receiving station.
• ON: Inserts FIGS
• OFF: Does not insert FIGS
Font Color (Receive)
(Default: R: 128, G: 255, B: 128)
Set the text font color for received characters.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio to
between 0 and 255.
LThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.
Font Color (Transmit)
(Default: R: 255, G: 106, B: 106)
Set the text color for transmitted characters.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio to
between 0 and 255.
LThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-29
FM repeater operation
A repeater receives your radio’s signals and
simultaneously retransmits them on a different
frequency to provide a greater communication range.
When using a repeater, the transmit frequency shifts
from the receive frequency by an offset amount. You
can access a repeater using the split function.
1. Select the desired operating band. (p. 3-3)
(Example: 28 MHz band)
2. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to set the operating frequency.
(Example: 29.650.00 MHz)
3. Select the FM mode.
4. Hold down
SPLIT
for 1 second.
• Turns the Split function ON.
• Turns the Tone function ON and “TONE” is displayed.
• Displays the transmit frequency.
Repeater Tone ON
Transmit frequency
Split function ON
L You can set the frequency offset for the HF band.
(p. 12-5)
MENU
» SET > Function > SPLIT >
FM SPLIT Offset (HF)
L You can set the frequency offset for the 50 MHz band.
(p. 12-5)
MENU
» SET > Function > SPLIT >
FM SPLIT Offset (50M)
D Setting the repeater tone frequency
Some repeaters require a subaudible tone to be
accessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on
your signal, and must be set in advance.
Do the following steps to set the tone frequency.
1. Select the FM mode.
2. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
3. Touch [TONE] for 1 second.
FUNCTION screen (FM mode)
• Opens the TONE FREQUENCY screen.
4. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to select the desired subaudible
tone frequency.
TONE FREQUENCY screen
Touch for 1
second to
reset to the
default.
• Selectable tone frequencies
67.0 88.5 114.8 151.4 177.3 203.5 250.3
69.3 91.5 118.8 156.7 179.9 206.5 254.1
71.9 94.8 123.0 159.8 183.5 210.7
74.4 97.4 127.3 162.2 186.2 218.1
77.0 100.0 131.8 165.5 189.9 225.7
79.7 103.5 136.5 167.9 192.8 229.1
82.5 107.2 141.3 171.3 196.6 233.6
85.4 110.9 146.2 173.8 199.5 241.8
Checking the repeater tone frequency
You can check the tone frequency by receiving the
repeater’s input frequency and tone scanning. To
receive the input signals, the transceiver detects
the subaudible tone frequency using the tone scan
function.
1. Touch [T-SCAN].
• The scan starts, and then stops when the matching
tone frequency as the repeater is received.
Blinks
while
scanning
2. To close the TONE FREQUENCY screen, push
EXIT
.
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-30
FM repeater operation (Continued)
D Checking the repeater input signal
You can check whether you can directly receive
another station’s transmit signal or not, by listening to
the repeater input frequency.
While receiving, hold down
XFC
to listen the repeater input
frequency.
While holding down
While holding
down
XFC
.
Release
XFC
.
Split function ON
Another station’s transmit frequency
Frequency offset
Tone squelch operation
The Tone squelch opens only when you receive a
signal that includes a matching subaudible tone in the
FM mode. You can silently wait for calls from other
stations using the same tone.
When you transmit, the tone frequency is
superimposed on your own signal.
1. Select the desired operating band.
(Example: 28 MHz)
2. Select the FM mode.
3. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to set the operating frequency.
(Example: 29.550.00 MHz)
4. Push
FUNCTION
.
• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
5. Touch [TONE] several times to select the Tone
squelch mode.
• “TSQL” is displayed.
L Touching [TONE] selects “TONE,” “TSQL” or OFF.
FUNCTION screen (FM mode)
6. Touch [TONE] again for 1 second.
• Opens the TONE FREQUENCY screen.
7. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to set the tone frequency.
TONE FREQUENCY screen
Touch for 1
second to
reset to the
default.
• Selectable tone frequencies
67.0 88.5 114.8 151.4 177.3 203.5 250.3
69.3 91.5 118.8 156.7 179.9 206.5 254.1
71.9 94.8 123.0 159.8 183.5 210.7
74.4 97.4 127.3 162.2 186.2 218.1
77.0 100.0 131.8 165.5 189.9 225.7
79.7 103.5 136.5 167.9 192.8 229.1
82.5 107.2 141.3 171.3 196.6 233.6
85.4 110.9 146.2 173.8 199.5 241.8
Checking another station’s tone frequency
You can check another station’s tone frequency by
tone scanning while the station is transmitting.
1. Touch [T-SCAN].
• The scan starts, and then stops when the matching
tone frequency as another station is received.
2. To close the TONE FREQUENCY screen, push
EXIT
.
Blinks
while
scanning
4
RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING
4-31
Data mode (AFSK) operation
You can operate the data mode using AFSK (Audio
Frequency Shift Keying).
L When operating RTTY in the AFSK mode, PSK31 or JT65
with a PC application software, refer to the software’s
instruction manual.
1. Connect a PC or other device to the transceiver.
L See “FSK and AFSK connections” (p. 2-5) for
connection details.
2. Select the operating band.
(Example: 51 MHz)
3. Set the data operating mode to LSB-D, USB-D,
AM-D or FM-D.
(Example: FM-D)
Data mode
4. Refer to the application software for
communication details.
L When operating in the SSB data mode, adjust the
device’s output level within the ALC zone.
TIP: The carrier point is displayed when operating AFSK in
the SSB data mode.
See the illustration below for a tone-pair example.
170 Hz
2125 Hz
2295 Hz
Mark Space
Carrier point
(displayed frequency)
Spectrum scope screen .......................................................... 5-2
D Using the Spectrum Scope ............................................. 5-2
D Center mode ................................................................... 5-3
D Fixed mode ..................................................................... 5-3
D Marker ............................................................................. 5-3
D Touch screen operation .................................................. 5-4
D Mini scope screen ........................................................... 5-4
D Adjusting the Reference level ......................................... 5-5
D Sweep speed .................................................................. 5-5
D Scope set screen ............................................................ 5-6
Audio scope screen ................................................................ 5-9
D Audio scope set screen .................................................. 5-9
5-1
Section 5 SCOPE OPERATION
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-2
Spectrum scope screen
This spectrum scope enables you to display the
activity on the selected band, as well as the relative
strengths of various signals.
The IC-7300 has two spectrum scope modes. One is
the Center mode, and another one is the Fixed mode.
You can also turn the Waterfall display ON or OFF.
In addition, you can select a Mini scope screen to
save screen space.
D Using the Spectrum Scope
1. Open the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
SCOPE
• Center mode screen
• Fixed mode screen
FFT scope zone
(FFT: Fast Fourier Transform)
FFT scope zone
Span (Display range)
Edge (Upper frequency)
Span (Display range)
Edge (Lower frequency)
Waterfall zone
Waterfall zone
Grid (frequency/level)
Grid (frequency/level)
Center/Fixed mode icon
Center/Fixed mode icon
Display frequency (stays on Center)
Display frequency (moves)
Key Action
< 1 >
< 2 >
Selects the Function menus.
SPAN
In the Center mode, selects the scope span.
• Selectable spans: ±2.5, 5.0, 10, 25, 50,
100, 250 and 500 kHz
L Touch for 1 sec ond to select the ±2.5 kHz
span.
EDGE
In the Fixed mode, selects the Edge
frequencies.
L You can set the Upper and lower Edge
frequencies in the SCOPE SET screen.
(p. 5-6
~ p. 5-8)
HOLD
Touch
Sets the Hold function to ON or
OFF.
• “
HOLD
” and the Marker are
displayed. Freezes the current
spectrum.
Touch for
1 second
Clears the Peak Hold level.
CENT/FIX Selects the Center or Fixed mode.
EXPD/
SET
Touch
Selects the Expanded or Normal
screen.
Touch for
1 second
Enters the SCOPE SET screen.
REF
Opens the Reference level window. (p. 5-6)
L Touch again to close the window.
L Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to adjust the
Reference level.
SPEED
Selects the sweep speed.
• “,” “,” or “” displays FAST, MID, or
SLOW.
MARKER Selects the Marker.
2. To exit the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
.
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen
Function menu (Menu 2)
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-3
D Center mode
Displays signals around the operating frequency
within the selected span. The operating frequency is
always displayed in the center of the screen.
1. Open the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
SCOPE
2. Touch [CENT/FIX].
• “
CENTER
” is displayed when the Center mode is
selected.
L Touch [CENT/FIX] to toggle between the Center and
Fixed modes.
3. Touch [SPAN] several times until the desired
scope span is selected.
• Selectable span:
±2.5, 5.0, 10, 25, 50, 100, 250 and 500 kHz
L Touch [SPAN] for 1 second to select the ±2.5 kHz
span.
4. To exit the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
.
2. Touch [CENT/FIX].
• “
FIX
” is displayed when the Fixed mode is
selected.
L Touch [CENT/FIX] to toggle between the Center and
Fixed modes.
3. Touch [EDGE] several times until the desired
Fixed Edge frequency band is selected.
L When the operating frequency moves outside
the upper or lower Edge frequency, “<<” or “>>”
is dispalyed in the upper side corners of the
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
<<: The frequency is outside the lower edge.
>>: The frequency is outside the higher edge.
When the frequency goes further away, “Scope Out
of Range” is displayed.
4. To exit the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
.
D Fixed mode
Displays signals within a specied frequency range.
The selected frequency band activity can easily be
observed using this mode.
Three Fixed Edge bands can be set for each amateur
frequency band covered by the transceiver. See page
5-7 for setting details.
1. Open the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
SCOPE
D Marker
The Marker displays the operating frequency in the
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
• Marker types
: RX Marker displays the receive frequency.
: TX Marker displays the transmit frequency.
Touch [MARKER] to select the marker.
• When the Center mode is selected:
TX, Marker OFF
• When the Fixed mode is selected:
RX/TX, RX
L When the Marker is displayed and the frequency is
out of range, “<<” or “>>” is displayed in the upper
side corners of the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
<<: The frequency is outside the lower edge.
>>: The frequency is outside the higher edge.
• About RX Marker
In the Fixed mode, the RX Marker displays the
operating frequency within a specied frequency
range. So, the transceiver always displays the RX
Marker in the scope screen.
In the Center mode, the operating frequency stays on
the Center of the screen. Thus, the transceiver does
not display the RX Marker.
L When the Hold function is ON, the RX Marker is displayed
the operating frequency’s position.
Spectrum scope screen (Continued)
Center mode screen
Fixed mode screen
MarkerMarker icon
RX Marker ON (Fixed mode)
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-4
Spectrum scope screen (Continued)
D Touch screen operation
When you touch the FFT scope zone or the waterfall
zone in the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, the area
will be zoomed in. Then you touch the signal in the
zoomed area, you can directly tune your frequency to
the signal in the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
L Holding down
XFC
changes the transmit frequency.
1. Open the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
SCOPE
2. Touch the Scope screen.
• A sectioon around the touched area is zoomed in.
LTouch only the FFT scope zone or Waterfall zone.
3. Touch the signal in the zoomed area.
InformationL
• In the Center mode, the operating frequency
changes to the touched point, and the point moves to
the screen center.
• In the Fixed mode, the operating frequency and
marker change to the touched point.
• Touch out of the zoomed area to close the zoomed
window.
4. To exit the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
.
D Mini scope screen
The Mini scope screen can be simultaneously
displayed with another function displays, such as
the RTTY DECODE screen and the AUDIO SCOPE
screen.
Push
M.SCOPE
to turn the Mini scope screen ON or
OFF.
L Hold down
M.SCOPE
for 1 second to display the
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
Mini scope screen with the AUDIO SCOPE screen
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-5
D Adjusting the Reference level
When monitoring a weak signal that is buried in the
noise fl oor, or monitoring a strong signal but some
stronger signals are nearby, adjusting the Reference
level of the screen helps to see these signals.
• Even if this setting is changed, it does not affect the
scope input level.
• When you adjust the Reference level, the signal
strength for the waterfall also appears to change.
1. Open the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
SCOPE
2. Touch [<1>].
• The function menu changes to Menu 2.
3. Touch [REF].
• Opens the Reference level window.
LTouch [REF] to open or close the window.
4. Rotate
MAIN DIAL
to adjust the level.
• Adjustable range: –20.0 dB ~ +20.0 dB
LTouch [REF] for 1 second to select ±0.0 dB.
5. Touch [REF].
• Closes the Reference level window.
6. To exit the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
.
D Sweep speed
Select the sweep speed to change the FFT scope
refresh speed and the waterfall speed.
L To change only the waterfall speed, select “Slow,”
“Mid,” or “Fast” in the Scope set screen. (p. 5-7)
1. Open the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
SCOPE
2. Touch [<1>].
• The function menu changes to Menu 2.
3. Touch [SPEED] several times until the desired
sweep speed is selected.
• Selectable speeds: FAST, MID, or SLOW
L“,” “,” or “” indicates FAST, MID, or SLOW.
L A popup window appears in the center of
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen and displays the
selected sweep speed for 1 second.
4. To exit the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
.
Spectrum scope screen (Continued)
Sweep speed (FAST)
Sweep speed (MID)
Sweep speed (SLOW)
“”
“”
“”
Difference spectrum (+20.0, ±0.0, –20.0 dB)
Reference level
(+20.0 dB)
Reference level
(–20.0 dB)
L If you adjust this setting to a positive level, all
signal levels appear stronger.
Or, if you adjust to a negative level, all signal
levels appear weaker.
–5.0k
SPECTRUM SCOPE Grid
1k/10dB
+4+3+2+10–4 –3 –2 –1
+5.0k
HOLD
CENTER
R T
–5.0k
SPECTRUM SCOPE Grid
1k/10dB
+4+3+2+10–4 –3 –2 –1
HOLD
CENTER
R T
±0.0 dB
+20.0 dB
–20.0 dB
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-6
Scope during TX (CENTER TYPE) (Default: ON)
Set the TX signal display to ON or OFF.
Max Hold (Default: 10s Hold)
Select the peak level holding function.
• OFF: Turns OFF the peak level holding
function.
• 10s Hold: Holds the peak spectrum for 10 seconds.
• ON: Continuously holds the peak spectrum.
CENTER Type Display (Default: Filter Center)
Select the center frequency of the SPECTRUM
SCOPE screen. (Only in the Center mode)
• Filter Center: Displays the selected lter’s center
frequency at the center of the
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
• Carrier Point Center:
Displays the carrier point frequency
of the selected operating mode at the
center of the SPECTRUM SCOPE
screen.
• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.):
In addition to the carrier point center
setting above, the actual frequency is
displayed at the bottom of the scope.
L Abs. Freq. : Absolute Frequency
Marker Position (Fix Type) (Default: Carrier Point)
Select the marker position on the SPECTRUM
SCOPE screen. (Only in the Fixed mode)
• Filter Center: Displays the Marker on the selected
lter’s center frequency.
• Carrier Point: Displays the Marker on the carrier
point frequency of the selected
operating mode.
VBW (Default: Narrow)
Select the Video Band Width (VBW).
• Narrow: Sets the VBW to narrow.
• Wide: Sets the VBW to wide.
L When “Wide” is selected, the line drawn on the
receive spectrum becomes wide. However, the
small edge cannot be drawn.
Averaging (Default: OFF)
Set the FFT scope waveform averaging function to
between 2 and 4, or OFF.
• OFF: The FFT scope screen refreshes at each
sweep time. This setting displays the
critical spectrum view.
• 2, 3, 4: The FFT scope screen averages 2
to 4 sweeps to smoothly display the
spectrum.
Waveform Type (Default: Fill)
Select the outline waveform display for the FFT scope
screen.
• Fill: The waveform is drawn only in color.
• Fill + Line: The waveform is drawn in color with an
outline.
D Scope set screen
This Set screen is used to set the waveform color,
Scope range for the Fixed mode, and so on.
1. Open the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
SCOPE
2. Touch [EXPD/SET] for 1 second.
3. Select the desired item.
4. Select the option or set the level.
L See below for details of the setting items and their
options.
5. To exit the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
several times.
Spectrum scope screen (Continued)
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays
the Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to
the default setting.
Rotate
Push
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-7
Waterfall Size (Expand Screen) (Default: Mid)
Select the Waterfall height in the Expand scope
screen.
• Small: The same height with the Normal scope
screen, only the FFT scope expands.
• Mid: The Waterfall height expands at the same
ratio with the FFT scope.
• Large: Only the Waterfall height expands.
Waterfall Peak Color Level (Default: Grid 8)
Select the signal level that the Waterfall displays a
peak color.
Higher signal levels are Red, Yellow, Green, Light-
blue, Blue and Black, in that order.
• Selection: Grid 1 ~ Grid 8
Waterfall Marker Auto-hide (Default: ON)
Set the Waterfall Marker Auto-hide function to ON or
OFF.
• OFF: The marker in the Waterfall zone stays ON.
• ON: The marker in the Waterfall zone is hidden
2 seconds after you have stopped it in place.
Fixed Edges
0.03 – 1.60 (Default: No.1 0.500–1.500 MHz)
(Default: No.2 0.500–1.500 MHz)
(Default: No.3 0.500–1.500 MHz)
Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the
Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.
• Setable range: 0.030 ~ 1.600 MHz
L Touch to select the Upper or Lower frequency,
and then rotate
MULTI
to select the frequency.
L You can also directly enter the edge frequency
using the keypad.
D Scope set screen (Continued)
Waveform Color (Current)
(Default: (R) 172 (G) 191 (B) 191)
Set the waveform color for the currently received
signals.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio from
0 to 255.
L The color is displayed in the box above the RGB
scale.
Waveform Color (Line)
(Default: (R) 56 (G) 24 (B) 0)
Set the waveform outline color for the currently
received signals.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio from
0 to 255.
L The color is displayed in the box above the RGB
scale.
Waveform Color (Max Hold)
(Default: (R) 45 (G) 86 (B) 115)
Set the waveform color for the received signals
maximum level.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio from
0 to 255.
L The color is displayed in the box above the RGB
scale.
Waterfall Display (Default: ON)
Turn the Water fall display ON or OFF for the normal
scope or Mini scope screens.
L In the Expanded scope screen, the Waterfall is
always displayed.
• OFF: Turns OFF the Waterfall display.
• ON: Turns ON the Waterfall display.
Waterfall Speed (Default: Mid)
Select the Waterfall speed.
• Slow: Sets the waterfall speed to Slow.
• Mid: Sets the waterfall speed to Mid.
• Fast: Sets the waterfall speed to Fast.
Spectrum scope screen
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-8
26.00 – 30.00 (Default: No.1 28.000–29.000 MHz)
(Default: No.2 28.000–28.200 MHz)
(Default: No.3 28.200–29.000 MHz)
• Setable range: 26.000 ~ 30.000 MHz
30.00 – 45.00 (Default: No.1 30.000–31.000 MHz)
(Default: No.2 30.000–31.000 MHz)
(Default: No.3 30.000–31.000 MHz)
• Setable range: 30.000 ~ 45.000 MHz
45.00 – 60.00 (Default: No.1 50.000–51.000 MHz)
(Default: No.2 50.000–50.100 MHz)
(Default: No.3 50.100–50.300 MHz)
• Setable range: 45.000 ~ 60.000 MHz
60.00 – 74.80 (Default: No.1 70.000–70.500 MHz)
(Default: No.2 70.000–70.250 MHz)
(Default: No.3 70.250–70.500 MHz)
• Setable range: 60.000 ~ 74.800 MHz
D Scope set screen (Continued)
1.60 – 2.00 (Default: No.1 1.800–2.000 MHz)
(Default: No.2 1.800–1.830 MHz)
(Default: No.3 1.900–1.930 MHz)
• Setable range: 1.600 ~ 2.000 MHz
2.00 – 6.00 (Default: No.1 3.500–4.000 MHz)
(Default: No.2 3.500–3.575 MHz)
(Default: No.3 3.750–3.850 MHz)
• Setable range: 2.000 ~ 6.000 MHz
6.00 – 8.00 (Default: No.1 7.000–7.300 MHz)
(Default: No.2 7.000–7.030 MHz)
(Default: No.3 7.030–7.200 MHz)
• Setable range: 6.000 ~ 8.000 MHz
8.00 – 11.00 (Default: No.1 10.100–10.150 MHz)
(Default: No.2 10.100–10.130 MHz)
(Default: No.3 10.130–10.150 MHz)
• Setable range: 8.000 ~ 11.000 MHz
11.00 – 15.00 (Default: No.1 14.000–14.350 MHz)
(Default: No.2 14.000–14.100 MHz)
(Default: No.3 14.100–14.350 MHz)
• Setable range: 11.000 ~ 15.000 MHz
15.00 – 20.00 (Default: No.1 18.068–18.168 MHz)
(Default: No.2 18.068–18.110 MHz)
(Default: No.3 18.110–18.168 MHz)
• Setable range: 15.000 ~ 20.000 MHz
20.00 – 22.00 (Default: No.1 21.000–21.450 MHz)
(Default: No.2 21.000–21.150 MHz)
(Default: No.3 21.150–21.450 MHz)
• Setable range: 20.000 ~ 22.000 MHz
22.00 – 26.00 (Default: No.1 24.890–24.990 MHz)
(Default: No.2 24.890–24.930 MHz)
(Default: No.3 24.930–24.990 MHz)
• Setable range: 22.000 ~ 26.000 MHz
Spectrum scope screen
5
SCOPE OPERATION
5-9
Audio scope screen
This audio scope enables you to display the received
signal’s frequency component on the FFT scope, and
its waveform components on the Oscilloscope. The
FFT scope also has an waterfall.
1. Open the AUDIO SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
AUDIO
Key Action
ATT
Touch
Selects the attenuator for the
FFT scope.
• 0 (OFF), 10, 20, or 30 dB
Touch for
1 second
Turns OFF the attenuator. (0 dB)
HOLD
Sets the Hold function to ON or OFF.
• “
HOLD
” is displayed and freezes the
current audio spectrum.
LEVEL
Selects the Oscilloscope level.
• 0, –10, –20, or –30 dB
TIME
Selects the Oscilloscope sweep time.
• 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, or 300 ms/Div
EXPD/
SET
Touch
Selects the Expanded or Normal
screen.
Touch for
1 second
Enters the AUDIO SCOPE SET
screen.
2. To exit the AUDIO SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
.
AUDIO SCOPE screen
OscilloscopeWaterfall zone
FFT Scope zone
D Audio scope set screen
This Set mode is used to set the FFT scope waveform
type, color, Waterfall display and oscilloscope
waveform color.
1. Open the AUDIO SCOPE screen.
MENU
»
AUDIO
2. Touch [EXPD/SET] for 1 second.
3. Select the desired item.
4. Rotate
MULTI
to select the option or set the level,
and then push
MULTI
.
• See below for details of the setting items and their
options.
5. To exit the AUDIO SCOPE screen, push
EXIT
several times.
FFT Scope Waveform Type (Default: Fill)
Select the type of waveform for the FFT scope.
• Fill: The full waveform is drawn in color.
• Line: Only the waveform outline is drawn.
FFT Scope Waveform Color
(Default: (R) 51 (G) 153 (B) 255)
Set the waveform color for the FFT scope.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio from
0 to 255.
LThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.
FFT Scope Waterfall Display (Default: ON)
Turn the Waterfall display ON or OFF.
• OFF: Turns OFF the Waterfall display.
• ON: Turns ON the Waterfall display.
Oscilloscope Waveform Color
(Default: (R) 0 (G) 255 (B) 0)
Set the waveform color for the Oscilloscope.
L Touch and select the R (Red), G (Green) or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate
MULTI
to adjust the ratio from
0 to 255.
LThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.
• AUDIO SCOPE screen
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays
the Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to
the default setting.
Rotate
Push
6-1
Section 6 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Recording a QSO audio ......................................................... 6-2
D Quick recording ............................................................... 6-2
D Basic recording ............................................................... 6-2
Playing back a QSO audio ..................................................... 6-3
Operation while playing back.................................................. 6-3
D Fast forward while playing .............................................. 6-3
D Rewind while playing ...................................................... 6-3
D Pause while playing ........................................................ 6-3
D Playing the previous le .................................................. 6-3
D Playing the next le ......................................................... 6-3
D Moving to the beginning of the previous le ................... 6-3
D Moving to the beginning of the next le .......................... 6-3
D VOICE PLAYER screen .................................................. 6-4
Checking the le information .................................................. 6-4
Checking the folder information .............................................. 6-5
Deleting a le .......................................................................... 6-5
D Deleting all les ............................................................... 6-5
Deleting a folder ..................................................................... 6-6
D Deleting all folders .......................................................... 6-6
SD Card information ............................................................... 6-6
Playing back the recorded le on the PC ............................... 6-7
RECORDER SET screen ....................................................... 6-8
PLAYER SET screen .............................................................. 6-9
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-2
Recording a QSO audio
D Quick recording
You can quickly record receive audio.
1. Push
QUICK
.
• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
2. Touch “<<REC Start>>.”
D Basic recording
You can record both receive and transmit audio.
1. Open the QSO RECORDER screen.
MENU
» RECORD
2. Touch “<<REC Start>>.”
This transceiver is equipped with a QSO recorder not
only for the receive audio, but also for the transmit
audio.
This function is useful to make a QSO record or
to conrm your QSO with a rare entity's station or
on a DX'pedition. You can also use the function to
repeatedly send the same message.
The recorded contents are saved onto an SD card.
There are 2 ways to record the communication.
NOTE:
• To record a QSO, an SD card (user supplied) is required.
• If your SD card does not have an "IC-7300" folder, back
up any data on the SD card, insert it in the transceivers
card slot and then format it using the built-in format
function. See “Formatting an SD card” (p. 8-3) for details.
• DO NOT insert the SD card while recording a QSO. The
recording may be interrupted and the SD card may be
damaged.
• Once the recording starts, it continues, even if the
transceiver is turned OFF and ON again.
• The recording continues until you touch <<REC Stop>>
or the the free space on the SD card has run out.
• When the recording le’s content becomes 2 GB, the
transceiver continues to record, but to a new le.
TIP: When the PTT Automatic Recording function
is set to ON in the Voice set mode, the recording
automatically starts when you push [PTT]. (p. 6-8)
TIP: About recording
• After the recording starts, a folder and le are
automatically created on the SD card.
L The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (yyyy: year,
mm: month, dd: day).
L The le name is formatted yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss
(yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day, hh: hour, mm:
minute, ss: second).
L The audio les recorded on the same day are saved
in the same folder.
• While recording, is lit and blinks.
• While standing by, the recording pauses.
• While pausing, blinks.
• When you touch , “Stop recording?” is
displayed.
L If you touch [YES], the recording stops and the
dialogue box dissappears.
L If you touch [NO], the dialogue box dissappears and
the recording continues.
• After the recording stops, turns OFF.
• Starts recording.
• “Recording started.” is briey displayed.
3. Push
QUICK
again.
• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
4. Touch “<<REC Stop>>.”
• Starts recording.
• “Recording started.” is briey displayed.
3. Touch “<<REC Stop>>.”
• Stops recording.
• “Recording stopped.” is briey displayed.
4. To close the QSO RECORDER screen, push
EXIT
.
• Stops recording.
• “Recording stopped.” is briey displayed.
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-3
Playing back a QSO audio Operation while playing back
You can playback the recorded QSO audio.
1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
MENU
» RECORD > Play Files
• The folder list is displayed.
2. Select a folder that contains the file you want to
playback.
You can fast forward or rewind while playing back.
You can change the skip time in the PLAYER SET
screen. (Default: 10 seconds)
MENU
» RECORD > Player Set > Skip Time
D Fast forward while playing
Touch to fast forward to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
D Rewind while playing
Touch to rewind to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
L If you touch within the rst 1 second of the le, at the
end of the previously recorded le will play back.
D Pause while playing
Touch .
L is displayed while pausing.
LTo cancel the pausing, touch .
D Playing the previous le
Touch to play the previous le.
L If there are other les in the folder, while the oldest le is
playing back, touch
to start playing the beginning of
the le.
D Playing the next le
Touch to play the next le.
L If there are other les in the folder, while the most recent
le is playing back, touch
to stop the playback.
D
Moving to the beginning of the previous le
z While paused, touch to move to the beginning
of the previous le.
L To playback the le, touch .
z While paused, touch to return to the beginning
of the le.
L To playback the le, touch .
D Moving to the beginning of the next le
While paused, touch to move to the beginning of
the next le.
LTo playback the le, touch .
Rotate
Push
• The le list is displayed.
3. Select the desired file.
• Starts a playback.
L Playback continues to the next le, and stops when
the last le in the folder is played back.
4. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
EXIT
several times.
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-4
Checking the le information
D VOICE PLAYER screen
The transceiver can display the recorded le’s
operating frequency, operating mode, date, and so on.
1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
MENU
» RECORD > Play Files
• The folder list is displayed.
2. Select a folder that contains the file you want to
playback.
Start Time
The recording start time
of the le being played
back.
The number of le
The number of the le
being played back,
and the total number of
recorded les.
Play the previous le Play the next le
Touch to pause or playback
Rewind Forward
• The le list is displayed.
3. Touch the desired file to check for 1 second.
Rotate
Push
• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
4. Touch “File Information.”
5. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
EXIT
several times.
Recording Information
Operating frequency,
operating mode, and audio
type: Receive (RX) or
Transmit (TX).
Operation while playing back (Continued)
Playback time
The playback elapsed
time.
Playback
process
Displays progress
of the le currently
playing back.
Playback icon
Displayed while playing back.
L Not displayed while paused.
Total time
The total time of the
recorded le.
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-5
Deleting a le
You can delete the recorded audio le.
1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
MENU
» RECORD > Play Files
• The folder list is displayed.
2. Select a folder that contains the file you want to
delete.
• The le list is displayed.
3. Touch the desired file to delete for 1 second.
Rotate
Push
• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
4. Touch “Delete.”
• “Delete le?” is displayed.
5. Touch [YES].
D Deleting all les
If you want to delete all audio les in the folder at one
time, select “Delete All” in step 4 above.
• The selected le is deleted.
6. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
EXIT
several times.
Checking the folder information
The transceiver can display the folder’s name, number
of the les in the folder, total capacity of the les and
date.
1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
MENU
» RECORD > Play Files
• The folder list is displayed.
2. Touch the desired folder you want to check the
contents of for 1 second.
• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
3. Touch “Folder Information.”
4. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
EXIT
several times.
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-6
SD Card information
1. Open the SD CARD screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card
2. Select “SD Card Info.”
3. To close the SD CARD screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
Rotate
Push
Deleting a folder
1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
MENU
» RECORD > Play Files
• The folder list is displayed.
2. Touch the desired folder to delete for 1 second.
• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
3. Touch “Delete.”
• “Delete folder?” is displayed.
4. Touch [YES].
• The selected folder is deleted.
5. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
EXIT
several times.
D Deleting all folders
If you want to delete all folders at one time, select
“Delete All Folders” in step 3 above.
You can delete the recorded audio folders.
NOTE: All the les in the folder are also deleted.
The SD CARD INFO screen
• The SD CARD INFO screen is displayed.
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-7
Playing back the recorded le on a PC
You can also playback the voice memory data on a
PC.
L The recorded information (frequency, date, and so on) is
not displayed.
L Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 is used for the description below.
1. Insert the SD card into your PC's SD card slot.
L If your PC does not have an SD card drive, connect
a memory card reader (user supplied) to the PC, and
then insert the SD card into the reader.
2. When the SD card is recognized by the PC, the
Auto Play window is displayed, as shown to the
right. Click “Open folder to view files.”
• The “IC-7300” folder is displayed.
3. Double-click the “IC-7300” folder.
4. Double-click the “Voice” folder.
5. Double-click the folder where the file you want to
playback is saved.
(Example: 20160106 folder)
6. To playback the file, double-click it.
(Example: 20160106_120255.wav)
NOTE:
• The operations while playing back may differ, depending
on the application. Refer to the application’s instruction
manual for details.
• When the le does not playback, even if you double click
the le, download an appropriate software. (Example:
Windows Media
®
Player)
PC
To the Card
reader
Transceiver
SD card
Click
Double-click
Double-click
Double-click
Double-click
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-8
RECORDER SET screen
You can change the RECORDER SET settings.
Details on each setting item are described below.
(Example: Setting the REC mode.)
1. Open the QSO RECORDER screen.
MENU
» RECORD
2. Select “Recorder Set.”
3. Select your desired item.
Rotate
Push
4. Select the REC mode “TX&RX” or “RX Only.”
5. To close the RECORDER SET screen, push
EXIT
several times.
REC Mode (Default: TX&RX)
Select the recording mode to record a QSO audio.
• TX&RX: Records both the transmitted and received
audio.
• RX Only: Records only the received audio.
TX REC Audio (Default: Direct)
Select the recording audio to transmit.
• Direct: Records the microphone audio.
• Monitor: Records the TX monitor audio.
RX REC Condition (Default: Squelch Auto)
Select the recording condition for receive.
• Always: Records even if no signal is received.
• Squelch Auto: Records only when the squelch
opens.
(The recording will be paused when
the squelch closes while recording.)
File Split (Default: ON)
Turn the File Split function ON or OFF.
• OFF: The audio is continuously recorded into
the le even if you switch between transmit
and receive or the squelch status changes
between open and closed.
When the recording le’s size becomes
2 GB, the transceiver continues to record, but
to a new le.
• ON: While recording, and if you switch between
transmit and receive, or the squelch status
changes between open and closed, a new le
is automatically created in the same folder,
and the audio is saved into the new one.
PTT Auto REC (Default: OFF)
Turn the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or
OFF.
• OFF: The recording does not start, even if a signal
is transmitted.
• ON: The recording automatically starts when a
signal is transmitted.
The recording will stop when:
• 10 seconds has passed without transmission after the last
transmission.
• 10 minutes has passed with no signal after the last
transmission.
- If you receive a signal within 10 seconds after the last
transmission, the received audio is also recorded.
- If you receive another signal within 10 seconds after the
last reception, the received audio is also recorded.
• 10 minutes has past while operating with the squelch is
open in the SSB, CW, RTTY, or AM mode.
• The frequency or operating mode is changed.
• The operating method (V/M, M-CH, Band Stacking
Register, and so on) is changed.
PRE-REC for PTT Auto REC (Default: 10sec)
Select whether or not record the audio that is received
before the PTT Automatic Recording function is
activated.
• OFF: Does not record the audio.
• 5sec/10sec/15sec:
Records the audio that is previously received
in this set period of time.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays
the Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to
the default setting.
6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
6-9
PLAYER SET screen
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays
the Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to
the default setting.
You can fast forward or rewind while playing back.
You can change the skip time in the PLAYER SET
screen.
1. Open the QSO RECORDER screen.
MENU
» RECORD
2. Select “Player Set.”
3. Select “Skip Time.”
Rotate
Push
4. Select your desired option.
• Options: 3sec, 5sec, 10sec, or 30sec.
5. To close the RECORD screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
Recording a Voice TX memory ............................................... 7-2
D Recording ....................................................................... 7-2
D Playing back ................................................................... 7-2
Entering a recording name ..................................................... 7-3
Transmitting a Voice memory content .................................... 7-4
D Transmitting .................................................................... 7-4
D Repeatedly transmitting .................................................. 7-4
D Adjusting the output level ................................................ 7-5
VOICE TX SET screen ........................................................... 7-6
7-1
Section 7 VOICE TX MEMORY OPERATION
7
VOICE TX MEMORY OPERATION
7-2
Recording a Voice TX memory
D Playing back
1. Do steps 1 ~ 3 as described to the left to display
the VOICE TX RECORD screen.
2. Rotate
MULTI
to select the desired Voice memory
“T1” ~ “T8,” and then push
MULTI
.
3. Push
to start the playback.
L Playback is automatically terminated when all of the
recorded content in the memory is played back.
LTo stop while playing back, touch
.
4. To close the VOICE TX screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
You can record up to 8 Voice transmit memories of up
to 1 and a half minutes in each memory.
To transmit recorded content using a Voice TX
memory, rst record the desired message, as
described below.
L A user supplied SD card is required to use the Voice
TX memory function.
L You can also transmit the recorded content using an
external keypad (pp. 2-3, 12-3).
D Recording
1. Open the VOICE TX screen in a Voice mode.
L(Voice mode: SSB, AM or FM modes).
MENU
»
VOICE
L You can select [VOICE] on the MENU screen only
while in a Voice mode.
2. Touch [REC/SET].
• Opens the REC/SET screen.
3. Touch the “REC” item.
• Opens the VOICE TX RECORD screen.
4. Select the desired Voice memory “T1” ~ “T8.”
Touch to open
the MIC GAIN
adjustment
window
While Recording
Displays the input audio level
Adjust the Mic
gain so that the
“REC Level”
meter does not
reach 100%
5. Touch to start recording.
InformationL
• You can record up to 1 and a half minutes in each
memory.
• Without holding down [PTT], speak into the
microphone at your normal voice level.
• Previously recorded content is overwritten.
6. Touch to stop recording.
7. To close the VOICE TX screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
TIP: How to clear the recorded content
Touching the Voice memory for 1 second in step 4
above displays the Quick menu, and then touch
“Clear.”
Rotate
Push
• Opens the selected Voice memory.
7
VOICE TX MEMORY OPERATION
7-3
Entering a recording name
You can assign a name of up to 16 characters to each
of the Voice memories “T1” ~ “T8.”
You can use upper case letters, lower case letters,
numbers, some symbols and spaces.
[Example: Entering “Contest” in Memory T1]
1. Open the VOICE TX screen in a Voice mode.
L(Voice mode: SSB, AM or FM modes).
MENU
»
VOICE
2. Touch [REC/SET].
• Opens the REC/SET screen.
3. Touch the “REC” item.
• Opens the VOICE TX RECORD screen.
4. Touch [p] or [q] to dispaly the desired Voice
memories “T1” ~ “T4” or “T5” ~ “T8,” and then
touch the memory for 1 second.
• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
5. Touch “Edit Name.”
• Opens the Name editing screen.
6. Enter a name of up to 16 characters.
L See “Keyboard entering and editing” (p. 1-8) for
details.
7. Touch [ENT] to save the entered name.
• The Name editing screen closes and returns to the
VOICE TX RECORD screen.
• The entered name is displayed.
8. To close the VOICE TX RECORD screen, push
EXIT
.
L The memory name is also displayed on the VOICE
TX screen.
7
VOICE TX MEMORY OPERATION
7-4
TIP:
When an external keypad (
pp. 2-3, 12-3) is connected,
you can transmit the recorded content.
• When pushing one of [S1] to [S4] on the external
keypad, the recorded content in T1 to T4 is transmitted
once.
• When holding down a key for 1 second, the recorded
content is repeatedly transmitted.
Transmitting a Voice memory content
You can transmit the Voice TX memory contents
once or repeatedly. This is useful for transmitting
your call sign and contest name in some contests, or
repeatedly calling CQ.
D Transmitting
Transmits the prerecorded content. (p. 6-2)
1. Open the VOICE TX screen in a Voice mode.
L(Voice mode: SSB, AM or FM modes).
MENU
»
VOICE
2. Touch the desired Voice memory key [T1] ~ [T8].
• Transmits the recorded content once.
InformationL
• The transceiver automatically transmits.
• The Memory Timer counts down.
• The transceiver automatically returns to receive
when all of the recorded content in the memory is
transmitted.
3. To close the VOICE TX screen, push
EXIT
.
• Repeatedly transmits the recorded content.
InformationL
• The transceiver automatically transmits.
• The Memory Timer counts down.
• “
” is displayed while repeatedly transmitting.
• Repeatedly transmits the recorded content for up to
10 minutes, at the interval specied in the “Repeat
Time” item of the VOICE TX SET screen (p. 7-6).
• After 10 minutes have passed, and all of the
recorded content in the memory is transmitted, the
transceiver automatically returns to receive .
• When a signal is received while in the transmit
interval, the transceiver pauses the next
transmission until the signal disappears. However,
if the squelch is set to open, the transceiver
repeatedly transmits following the repeat interval
even signals are received.
3. To close the VOICE TX screen, push
EXIT
.
D Repeatedly transmitting
1. Open the VOICE TX screen in a Voice mode.
L(Voice mode: SSB, AM or FM modes).
MENU
»
VOICE
2. Touch the desired Voice memory key [T1] ~ [T8]
for 1 second.
This icon
blinks while
transmitting.
This icon
blinks while
transmitting.
TIP: How to cancel a Voice TX transmittion
• Touch any keys other than [TX LEVEL] on the VOICE
TX screen
• Push
EXIT
,
V/M
,
▲
, or
▼
• Touch the frequency’s MHz digits or the Memory
channel number
• Turn OFF the transceiver
7
VOICE TX MEMORY OPERATION
7-5
Transmitting a Voice TX memory (Continue)
D Adjusting the output level
Adjusts theTransmit voice level.
1. Open the VOICE TX screen in a Voice mode.
L(Voice mode: SSB, AM or FM modes).
MENU
»
VOICE
2. Touch [TX LEVEL].
• Opens the “TX LEVEL” window.
3. Touch any desired Voice memory key other than
[T4] or [T8]. ([T1], [ T2], [T3], [T5], [T6] or [T7])
• The transceiver automatically transmits.
L To adjust the Transmit voice level using [T4] or [T8],
reverse steps 2 and 3 .
4. While transmitting, rotate
MAIN DIAL
to adjust the
transmit voice level.
L The transceiver automatically returns to receive
when all of the recorded content in the memory is
transmitted.
L Adjusting TX LEVEL too high may result in an over
modulation and transmit signal distortion.
5. To close the VOICE TX screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
Rotate
MAIN DIAL
Touch for 1 second to
reset to the default setting
TIP: How to cancel a Voice TX transmittion
• Touch any keys other than [TX LEVEL] on the VOICE
TX screen
• Push
EXIT
,
V/M
,
▲
, or
▼
• Touch the frequency’s MHz digits or the Memory
channel number
• Turn OFF the transceiver
7
VOICE TX MEMORY OPERATION
7-6
Auto Monitor (Default: ON)
Turn the Automatic Monitor function for recorded
audio contents transmission, ON or OFF.
• ON: Automatically monitors transmit audio when
sending a recorded audio.
• OFF: Monitors transmit audio only when the
Monitor function is ON.
Repeat Time (Default: 5sec)
Set the repeat interval to repeat the voice
transmission.
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
content at this interval.
L Repeatedly transmits the recorded content for up to
10 minutes.
L After 10 minutes have passed, and all of the
recorded content in the memory is transmitted, the
transceiver automatically returns to receive.
• Range: Between 1 and 15 seconds
This Set screen is used to set the Automatic Monitor
function and the Transmit Repeat Interval.
1. Open the VOICE TX screen in a Voice mode.
L(Voice mode: SSB, AM or FM modes).
MENU
»
VOICE
2. Touch [REC/SET].
• Opens the REC/SET screen.
3. Touch the “SET” item.
• Opens the VOICE TX SET screen.
4. Touch the desired item.
5. Select the option or set the time.
L See to the upper right for details of the setting items
and their options.
6. To close the VOICE TX screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays
the Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to
the default setting.
VOICE TX SET screen
8-1
Section 8 USING AN SD CARD
About the SD card .................................................................. 8-2
Saving data onto the SD card................................................. 8-2
Inserting or removing the SD card .......................................... 8-2
D Inserting .......................................................................... 8-2
D Removing ........................................................................ 8-2
Unmounting an SD card ......................................................... 8-3
Formatting an SD card ........................................................... 8-3
Saving the setting data onto an SD card ................................ 8-4
D Saving in the old rmware format ................................... 8-4
D Saving with a different le name ..................................... 8-5
Loading the saved data les onto an SD card ........................ 8-6
Deleting a data le .................................................................. 8-7
Displaying the information ...................................................... 8-7
Backing up the data saved on the SD card onto a PC ........... 8-8
D About the SD card’s folder contents ............................... 8-8
D Making a backup le on your PC .................................... 8-9
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-2
About the SD card Saving data onto the SD card
The SD and SDHC cards are not supplied by Icom.
User supplied.
You can use an SD card of up to 2 GB, or an SDHC of
up to 32 GB.
Icom has checked the compatibility with the following
SD and SDHC cards.
(As of February 2016)
Brand Type Memory size
SanDisk
®
SD 2 GB
SDHC
4 GB
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
L The above list does not guarantee the card’s
performance.
L Throughout the rest of this document, the SD card
and an SDHC card are simply called the SD card or
the card.
TIP: Icom recommends that you save the transceiver’s
factory default data for backup. (p. 8-4)
NOTE: Format all SD cards to be used with the
transceiver with the built-in Format function. Format, even
preformatted cards for PCs or other uses. (p. 8-3)
NOTE:
• Before using the SD card, thoroughly read the card’s
instructions.
• If you do any of the following, the card data may be
corrupted or deleted.
- You remove the card from the transceiver while the
card is being accessed.
- A power failure occurs or the power cable is
disconnected while the card is being accessed.
- You drop, impact or vibrate the card.
• Do not touch the contacts of the card.
• The transceiver takes a longer time to recognize a high
capacity card.
• The card will get warm if continuously used for a long
period of time.
• The card has a certain lifetime, so data reading or writing
may not be possible after using it for a long period.
When reading or writing data is impossible, the card’s
lifetime has ended. In that case, use a new one.
We recommend you make a separate backup le of the
important data onto your PC. (p. 8-8)
• Icom will not be responsible for any damage caused by
data corruption of a card.
You can save the following data onto the card:
• Data settings of the transceiver
Memory channel contents saved in the transceiver.
• Communication content
The transmitted and received audio.
• Communication log
The communication and receive history log.
• Voice audio for the Voice TX function
Voice audio to use with the Voice TX function.
• RTTY decode log
The transmitted or received RTTY decode history
log.
• Captured screens
Inserting or removing the SD card
D Inserting
Insert the card into the slot until it locks in place, and
makes a ‘click’ sound.
• Displays the SD card icon when the SD card is inserted.
LBe sure to check the card orientation.
D Removing
Push in the SD card until a click sounds.
• The card is unlocked, and you can pull it out.
L If you remove the SD card while the transceiver’s power is
ON, be sure to unmount it. (p. 8-3)
LOCK
SD
LOCK
SD
Inserting Removing
Card orientation
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-3
Formatting an SD card
Before using an SD card with the transceiver, be sure
to format all SD cards with the built-in Format function.
This creates a special folder on the card that you need
for operations like updating the rmware.
Format all cards, including a brand new SD card, and
even preformatted cards for PCs or other uses.
NOTE: Formatting a card erases all its data. Before
formatting any used card, back up its data onto your PC.
(p. 8-8)
IMPORTANT: Even if you format an SD card, some data
may remain in the card. When you dispose the card, be
sure to physically destroy it to avoid unauthorized access
to any data that remains.
1. Insert an SD card into the card slot.
2. Open the SD CARD set screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card
3. Select “Format.”
Rotate
Push
SD CARD set screen
4. Touch [YES] to start formatting.
LTo cancel formatting, touch [NO].
• After formatting, returns to the SD CARD set screen.
5. To close the SET screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
Unmounting an SD card
1. Open the SD CARD set screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card
2. Select “Unmount.”
Rotate
Push
SD CARD set screen
3. Touch [YES] to unmount.
LTo cancel unmounting, touch [NO].
Before you remove a card when the transceiver is ON,
be sure to electrically unmount it, as shown below.
Otherwise the data may be corrupted or deleted.
• After unmounting, returns to the SD CARD set screen.
4. To close the SET screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
5. Remove the card from the transceiver.
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-4
Saving the setting data onto an SD card
You can save the Memory channels and the
transceiver’s settings onto a card.
This function is convenient when:
• Copying the saved data to another IC-7300 to
operate with the same data.
• Using one IC-7300 by two or more operators with
their own individual data.
1. Insert an SD card into the card slot.
2. Open the SAVE SETTING screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card > Save Setting
3. Select “<<New File>>.”
Rotate
Push
SAVE SETTING screen
L The le name is automatically set in the following
format: Setyyyymmdd_xx (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd:
day, xx: serial number)
L If you want to change the le name, see “Saving with
a different le name.” (p. 8-5)
TIP: After you update the transceiver’s rmware, the “Save
Form” item will be added on the SD CARD set screen.
If this item is set to the earlier rmware version, the
conrmation window is displayed after step 3. When you
save the data in the earlier rmware version, touch [YES].
4. Touch [ENT].
5. Touch [YES].
• Saves the data settings.
L While saving to the card, the SD card icon blinks.
L After saving, returns to the SD CARD set screen.
6. To close the SET screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
D Saving in the old rmware format
After you update the transceiver’s rmware, the “Save
Form” item will be added on the SD CARD set screen.
With this item, you can select the rmware version to
save the setting data onto an SD card.
You can write the setting le that is saved in an earlier
version to an earlier rmware version IC-7300.
MENU
» SET > SD Card > Save Form
L Depending on the transceiver’s rmware version,
this item may not be displayed. In that case, save
the le in the current version.
LSee page 15-2 for details of the rmware update.
NOTE:
• If you select “Old Ver (xxx - xxx),” a function that is added
when the transceiver’s rmware format is updated will not
be saved.
• You cannot write a setting le that is saved in the current
version format to an earlier rmware version IC-7300.
TIP: To overwrite the setting data, select the desired le
in step 2.
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-5
Saving the setting data onto an SD card (Continued)
D Saving with a different le name
You can change the le name to one of up to 15
characters. You can use upper case letters, lower
case letters, numbers, some symbols and spaces.
* You cannot enter symbols: \ / : ; * ? " < > ǀ
If you enter those symbols, an error message is
displayed and you cannot save the le.
(Example: Changing a le name to “My data.”)
1. Open the SAVE SETTING screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card > Save Setting
2. Select “<<New File>>.”
Rotate
Push
SAVE SETTING screen
3. Touch [CLR] to delete the previously entered
character.
L If you continuously touch [CLR], all the characters are
deleted.
• The character to the left of the cursor is deleted.
4. Touch the keyboard to enter a desired name, and
then touch [ENT].
L See “Keyboard entering and editing” (p. 1-8) for
details.
5. Touch [YES].
• Saves the data settings.
L While saving, the SD card icon blinks.
L After saving, automatically returns to the SD CARD
set screen.
6. To close the SET screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-6
Loading the saved data les onto an SD card
You can load the Memory channels and transceiver’s
settings from the card to the transceiver.
This function is convenient when:
• Copying the saved data to another IC-7300 to
operate with the same data.
• Using one IC-7300 by two or more operators with
their own individual data.
L The transceiver has “ALL” and “Select” loading
options to choose from.
TIP: Saving the current data is recommended before
loading other data into the transceiver.
(Example: Loading the selected data)
1. Open the LOAD SETTING screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card > Load Setting
2. Select the desired file to be loaded.
Rotate
Push
LOAD SETTING screen
3. Select “Select.”
4. Touch the desired loading option.
• “✓” is displayed left side of the selected option.
L The Set mode settings and Memory channel contents
are always loaded.
5. Touch “<<Load>>.”
6. Touch [YES].
• Starts the le check.
L While checking the le, “Checking the le.” and a
progress bar are displayed.
L When you select “REF Adjust” in step 4, “The new
"REF Adjust" setting will be saved” is displayed.
7. After checking, the file loading starts.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are
displayed.
8. After loading ends, “Restart the IC-7300” is
displayed.
Turn the transceiver power OFF, then ON again to
restart the transceiver.
TIP: When you select “ALL” in step 3, the following
contents are loaded.
• CI-V Address
• Setting of the “REF Adjust” item in the Set mode.
• Set mode settings and Memory channel contents
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-7
Deleting a data le
Deleting an unnecessary data le shortens the period
of time needed to recognize the SD card.
NOTE: Deleted data from a card cannot be recalled.
Before deleting any data, back up the card data onto your
PC.
1. Open the SAVE SETTING screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card > Save Setting
2. Touch the desired file to be deleted for 1 second.
Rotate
SAVE SETTING screen
3. Touch “Delete.”
LTo delete all les, touch “Delete All.”
LTo cancel deleting, push
EXIT
.
• Opens the conrmation window.
4. Touch [YES].
• Deletes the selected le.
LAfter deleting, returns to the SAVE SETTING screen.
5. To close the SET screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
Displaying the information
You can display the SD card capacity and the time
remaining for voice recording.
1. Open the SD CARD set screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card
2. Select “SD Card Info.”
SD CARD set screen
Rotate
Push
SD CARD INFO screen
• Opens the SD CARD INFO screen.
3. To close the SET screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-8
Backing up the data saved on the SD card onto a PC
You can easily restore data with a backup le even if
the setting data in the SD card is accidentally deleted.
D About the SD card’s folder contents
The folder in the SD card contains the following:
1. IC-7300 folder
The folders created in the IC-7300 are contained
in this folder.
2. Capture folder
The captured screen data is saved in the ‘png’ or
‘bmp’ format.
3. Decode folder
The RTTY decode log folder is created.
4. RTTY folder
The transmitted or received RTTY decode log
data is saved in the ‘txt’ format*.
* You can change the le format to ‘html’ in the
RTTY DECODE LOG SET screen. (p. 4-27)
5. Setting folder
The transceiver’s setting data is saved in the ‘dat’
format.
6. Voice folder
The recorded QSO audio date folders are created.
7. yyyymmdd folder
Recorded audio les are saved in the ‘wav’ format.
The folder name is automatically created in
the following format: yyyymmdd (yyyy:Year,
mm:month, dd:day)
8. VoiceTx folder
Recorded voice audio data for the Voice TX
function is saved in the ‘wav’ format.
6. Voice 7. yyyymmdd
7. yyyymmdd
2. Capture
3. Decode
8. VoiceTx
4. Rtty
5. Setting
1. IC-7300
(Example: Selecting the setting data)
When the PC reads the SD card data, the screens
shown below are displayed.
Click
Double-click
Double-click
The setting data
8
USING AN SD CARD
8-9
Backing up the data saved on the SD card onto a PC (Continued)
D Making a backup le on your PC
Windows 7 is used for these instructions.
1. Insert the SD card into the SD card drive or a
memory card reader* on your PC.
*User supplied.
2. The “AutoPlay” screen is displayed, as shown to
the right.
Click “Open folder to view files.”
• Displays the IC-7300 folder.
3. Right-click “Removal Disk,” and then click “Copy.”
4. Open the desired folder to make a backup file,
and then, right-click on the folder.
Then, click “Paste.”
• Pastes the copied SD card data onto the hard disk.
(Example: Pasting into the “Backup” folder in the
C drive)
5. When removing the SD card from your PC, be
sure to safety remove it.
L The screen shot shows when a memory card reader
is inserted.
6. After “Safe To Remove Hardware” is displayed,
remove the SD card from your PC.
Click
Click
Click
Right-click
Click
9-1
Section 9 MEMORY OPERATION
Memory channels ................................................................... 9-2
Selecting a memory channel .................................................. 9-2
D Selecting with the up and down keys .............................. 9-2
D Selecting using the keypad ............................................. 9-2
D Selecting in the MEMORY screen .................................. 9-3
Entering memory channel contents ........................................ 9-3
D Entering in the VFO mode .............................................. 9-3
D Entering in the Memory mode ......................................... 9-3
Clearing a memory channel.................................................... 9-4
Copying the Memory channel contents .................................. 9-4
D Copying to the other memory channel ............................ 9-4
D Copying to the VFO ........................................................ 9-4
Entering a memory name ....................................................... 9-5
About the MEMORY screen ................................................... 9-5
Memo Pad .............................................................................. 9-6
D Saving the displayed contents into a Memo Pad ............ 9-6
D Calling up the Memo Pads .............................................. 9-6
D Using the Memo Pad list ................................................. 9-6
9
MEMORY OPERATION
9-2
Memory channels
The transceiver has 101 memory channels. The
Memory mode enables you to quickly select often-
used frequencies.
You can temporarily tune all 101 memory channel
frequencies by rotating
MAIN DIAL
.
Memory channel
Memory
channel
number
Capability
Transfer
to VFO
Over-
writing
Clear
Regular memory
channels
1 to 99
1 frequency and 1 mode in each memory
channel.
Yes Yes Yes
Scan Edge
memory channels
P1 and P2
1 frequency and 1 mode in each memory
channel as scan edges for programmed
scans.
Yes Yes No
D Selecting with the up and down keys
1. Push
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
2. Push
▲
or
▼
to select the desired memory
channel.
L You can also select the memory channel with
the microphone [UP] and [DN] keys.
Memory mode
(Example: Memory channel 1)
3. To return to the VFO mode, push
V/M
again.
D Selecting using the keypad
1. Push
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
2. Touch the MHz digit on the operating frequency.
• The BAND STACKING REGISTER screen is displayed.
3. Touch [F-INP].
• The F-INP screen is displayed.
Selecting a memory channel
4. Enter the desired memory channel number.
(Example: memory channel 2)
5. Touch [MEMO] to set the entered memory
channel.
Memory channel 2 is selected
9
MEMORY OPERATION
9-3
D Selecting in the MEMORY screen
1. Open the MEMORY screen.
MENU
»
MEMORY
2. Select the desired memory channel by rotating
and then pushing
MULTI
.
(Example: memory channel 2)
Memory channel 2 is selected
D Entering in the VFO mode
[Example: Entering 7.088 MHz, LSB, into memory
channel 2]
1. Push
V/M
to select the VFO mode.
• “VFO A” or “VFO B” is displayed.
2. Set the frequency, operating mode and filter.
3. Push
▲
or
▼
to select the channel to enter.
• “BLANK” is displayed if the selected channel has no
contents.
L If the selected channel was previously entered,
the contents will be overwritten.
4. Touch the channel number.
L You cannot touch the channel number when the Mini
scope screen or expanded screen is displayed.
• The VFO/MEMORY screen is displayed.
5. Touch [MW] for 1 second to save the entered
contents into the selected channel.
• “BLANK” disappears or the selected channel’s
contents are overwritten.
Memory channel selection (Continue)
You can enter memory channel contents in either the VFO mode or the Memory mode.
Entering memory channel contents
D Entering in the Memory mode
[Example: Entering 21.280 MHz, USB, into memory
channel 3]
1. Push
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
2. Push
▲
or
▼
to select the channel to enter.
• “BLANK” is displayed if the selected memory channel
has no contents.
L If the selected channel is previously entered, the
contents will be overwritten.
3. Set the desired frequency, operating mode, and
filter. (p. 3-3)
4. Touch the channel number.
• The VFO/MEMORY screen is displayed.
5. Touch [MW] for 1 second to save the entered
contents into the selected channel.
• “BLANK” disappears or the selected channel’s
contents are overwritten.
Rotate
Push
9
MEMORY OPERATION
9-4
Clearing a memory channel
Copying the Memory channel contents
You can clear any no-longer-used memory channel
and set it as a blank channel.
[Example: Clearing Memory channel 3]
1. Push
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
2. Push
▲
or
▼
to select the channel to clear.
3. Touch the channel number.
• The VFO/MEMORY screen is displayed.
4. Touch [M-CLR] for 1 second to clear the memory
channel.
• “BLANK” is displayed.
D Copying to the other memory channel
You can copy the Memory contents to another
memory channel.
[Example: Copying the contents of Memory channel 1
to the Memory channel 2]
1. Push
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
2. Push
▲
or
▼
to select the channel to be
copied. (Example: memory channel 1)
3. Open the MEMORY screen.
MENU
»
MEMORY
4. Select the desired memory channel to be
overwritten (Example: memory channel 2), and
then
touch .
• The MEMORY MENU is displayed.
Rotate
5. Select “Memory Write.”
The contents of
Memory channel 1
6. Touch [ Yes].
• A beep sounds and the selected memory contents are
copied.
• Returns to the MEMORY screen.
D Copying to the VFO
You can copy the Memory contents to the VFO.
[Example: Copying the contents of Memory channel 1
to the VFO]
1. Push
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
2. Push
▲
or
▼
to select the channel to be
copied. (Example: memory channel 1)
3. Hold down
V/M
for 1 second.
• A beep sounds and the selected memory contents are
copied to the VFO.
You can copy a Memory channel contents to the VFO or another memory channel.
Rotate
Push
9
MEMORY OPERATION
9-5
Entering a memory name
You can assign a name of up to 10 characters to all
memory channels, including scan edges.
You can use upper case letters, lower case letters,
numbers, some symbols and spaces.
The names you enter will be displayed along with the
memory channel contents.
[Example: Entering “Icom 01” in Memory channel 2]
1. Open the MEMORY screen.
MENU
»
MEMORY
2. Select the desired memory channel to enter a
name.
L You can only select a channel with memory contents.
3.
While Memory channel 2 is selected, touch
QUICK
.
• The QUICK MENU screen is displayed.
4. Select “Edit Name.”
• The “MEMORY NAME” editing screen is displayed.
5. Enter a name of up to 10 characters.
L See “Keyboard entering and editing” (p. 1-8) for
details.
6. Touch [ENT] to save the entered name.
• The MEMORY NAME screen closes and returns to the
MEMORY screen.
• The entered name is displayed.
L The memory name is also displayed on the Standby
mode screen.
Rotate
Memory name
About the MEMORY screen
q w
e
r
t
y
q Frequency
Displays the entered frequency.
w Operating mode
Displays the selected operating mode.
e Memory menu
Touch to display the MEMORY MENU.
L You can select between “Edit Name,” “Memory Write”
and “Memory Clear” is selectable.
r Memory name
Displays the memory name, if entered.
LSee the left column for details.
t Select memory icon
Touch this icon to set the select number “1,”
“2,” “3” or OFF.
L You can also touch the icon for 1 second to display
the SELECT ALL CLEAR screen, and then select the
desired item to reset the select number.
y Memory channel number
Displays the memory channel number.
L“P1” or “P2” is displayed for the Scan Edge
memory channels.
Rotate
Push
9
MEMORY OPERATION
9-6
Memo Pad
Save the displayed content by touching
MPAD
for 1
second.
L When you save the 6th Memo Pad, the oldest
Memo Pad is automatically cleared to make room
for the new Memo Pad.
NOTE:
Each Memo Pad must have its own unique contents.
The Memo Pads with identical content cannot be
saved.
There are 5 Memo Pads as the default to save
frequencies and operating modes for easy write and
recall. You can increase the Memo Pads to 10 in
“Memopad Numbers” (p. 12-6).
MENU
»
SET > Function > Memo Pad Quantity
L The Memo Pads are separate from memory
channels.
D Saving the displayed contents into a
Memo Pad
Operating frequency
of the VFO mode or
Memory mode
Newest Pad
Oldest Pad
Cleared
Memo Pad
Memo Pads are convenient when you want to
temporarily memorize a frequency and operating
mode, such as when you nd a DX station in a pile-up,
or when the desired station is busy for a long time and
you want to temporarily search for other stations.
You can use the Memo Pads in both the VFO and
Memory modes.
Use Memo Pads instead of relying on hastily scribbled
notes that are easily misplaced.
MPAD
D Calling up the Memo Pads
You can call up the saved Memo Pads.
Push
MPAD
several times until the desired Pad is
displayed.
L The calling up starts with the most recently saved
contents.
TIP: When you call up a Memo Pad, the contents
that were previously displayed is automatically saved
in a temporary pad. You can recall the temporary pad
by pushing
MPAD
several times until the desired Pad
is displayed.
• You may think there are 6 Memo Pads because 6
different frequencies are called up. However, 5 are in
Memo Pads and 1 is in a temporary pad).
D Using the Memo Pad list
1. Open the MEMO PAD list screen.
MENU
»
MPAD
2. Touch [▲] or [▼] to select the desired Memo Pad.
L Touch [DEL] for 1 second to delete the selected
Memo Pad.
L Touch [DEL ALL] for 1 second to delete all the
Memo Pads.
3. Touch
EXIT
to close the MEMO PAD list screen.
TIP: If you change the frequency or operating
mode called up from Memo Pads, the contents are
automatically updated in a temporary Pad.
Temporary Pad
10-1
Section 10 SCANS
Scan types ............................................................................ 10-2
Preparation ........................................................................... 10-2
D Squelch status .............................................................. 10-2
Scan Set mode ..................................................................... 10-2
Programmed scan and Fine Programmed scan (VFO mode)
.. 10-3
D Programmed scan operation ........................................ 10-3
D Fine Programmed scan operation ................................ 10-3
Memory scan and Select Memory scan (Memory mode) ..... 10-4
D Memory scan operation ................................................ 10-4
D Select Memory scan operation ..................................... 10-5
D Setting Select Memory channel .................................... 10-5
D Canceling all Select Memory channel settings ............. 10-5
∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO and Memory modes) ....... 10-6
D ∂F scan operation ........................................................ 10-6
D Fine ∂F scan operation ................................................ 10-6
Tone scan operation ............................................................. 10-7
10
SCANS
10-2
Scan types Scan Set mode
You can set the Scan speed and the Scan Resume
function in the Scan Set mode.
1. Open the SCAN screen.
MENU
» SCAN
2. Touch [SET].
• Opens the SCAN SET screen.
3. Select the desired item.
Rotate
Push
SCAN SET screen
4. Select the desired option.
L See below for details of the setting items and their
options.
5. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
The IC-7300 has several scan types as listed below.
Scan types Operation
Programmed
scan (p.10-3)
Repeatedly scans between 2 Scan
Edge frequencies (Scan Edge memory
channels P1 and P2).
The scan starts from the lower edge
frequency.
Memory
scan (p.10-4)
Repeatedly scans all entered Memory
channels.
Select
Memory
scan (p.10-4)
Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select
Memory channels.
∂F scan
(p.10-6)
Repeatedly scans within the ∂F span area.
The scan starts from the center frequency.
Preparation
D Squelch status
Scans work with the squelch status.
Be sure to adjust the squelch level according to your
operating conditions.
L When
AF RF/SQL
operates as only an RF gain
control, you cannot adjust the squelch level.
L Normally, set
AF RF/SQL
to the point where noise
disappears, and the TX/RX indicator goes off.
When the scan starts with the squelch open:
• For a Programmed scan
When the tuning step is 1 kHz or less, the scan
continues until it is manually stopped— it does not
pause* even if signals are detected.
* The scan pauses when the squelch is closed and then
opened. The scan resumes after 10 seconds has passed
when the Scan Resume function is ON. It is cancelled
when the function is OFF.
When the tuning step is 5 kHz or more, the scan
pauses on each step when the Scan Resume function
is ON. It does not pause when the function is OFF.
• For a memory scan
The scan pauses on each channel when the Scan
Resume function is ON. The scan does not pause
when the function is OFF.
When the scan starts with the squelch closed:
The scan stops when a signal is detected.
• When the Scan Resume function is ON, the scan pauses
for 10 seconds after detecting a signal, then resumes 2
seconds after the signal disappears.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays
the Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to
the default setting.
SCAN Speed (Default: Fast)
Set the desired scan speed to slow or fast.
• Slow: Scan speed is slow.
• Fast: Scan speed is fast.
SCAN Resume (Default: ON)
Set the scan resume function to ON or OFF.
• OFF: When a signal is detected, cancels the scan.
• ON: When a signal is detected, scan pauses for
10 seconds, then resumes. Two seconds after
the signal disappears, the scan resumes.
10
SCANS
10-3
Programmed scan and Fine Programmed scan (VFO mode)
Programmed scan and Fine Programmed scan
Scan
Scan edge
P1 or P2
Scan edge
P2 or P1
Jump
Repeatedly scans between two Scan Edge frequencies.
The edge frequencies are preset in P1 and P2 as the
default.
P1: 0.500000 MHz P2: 29.999999 MHz
L To change the P1 and P2 Scan Edge Memory
channels, see “Entering memory channel contents”
(p. 9-3) for details.
L If the same frequencies are entered into P1 and
P2, the Programmed scan does not start.
L In the Fine Programmed scan, the scan speed
decreases when the squelch opens, but the
transceiver keeps scanning. The scan tuning step
changes to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.
D Programmed scan operation
1. Push
V/M
to select the VFO mode.
2. Select the operating mode in the MODE screen.
LYou can change the operating mode while scanning.
3. Select the desired tuning step in the TS screen.
LYou can change the tuning step while scanning.
4. Open the SCAN screen.
MENU
» SCAN
5. Touch [PROG] to start the Programmed scan.
Blinks
Blinks
While programmed scanning
L “PROGRAM SCAN” and the decimal points blink
while scanning.
6. Touch [PROG] to cancel the scan.
7. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
D Fine Programmed scan operation
1. Start the Programmed scan.
L See steps 1 ~ 5 in “Programmed scan operation” to
the left for details.
2. While Programmed scanning, touch [FINE] to
switch to the File Programmed scan.
While Programmed scanning
While Fine Programmed scanning
Blinks
Blinks
L While Fine Programmed scanning, “FINE PROGRAM
SCAN” blinks instead of “PROGRAM SCAN.”
L Each time you touch [FINE], the Programmed scan
and the Fine Programmed scan are switched.
3. Touch [PROG] to cancel the scan.
4. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
10
SCANS
10-4
Memory scan and Select Memory scan (Memory mode)
Memory scan
Ch 1
★
1
Ch 5
★1
Ch 2
★
2
Ch 3
★1
Ch 4
Ch 6
★
3
Ch 7
★1
Ch 99
★1
Blank channel
*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel
is specified as a select memory.
Repeatedly scans all entered Memory channels.
Blank (not entered) Memory channels are skipped.
L If two or more Memory channels are not entered,
the Memory scan does not start.
Select Memory scan
Ch 1
★
1
Ch 5
★1
Ch 2
★
2
Ch 3
★1
Ch 4
Ch 6
★
3
Ch 7
★1
Ch 99
★1
Blank channel
*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel
is specified as a select memory.
Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 Select Memory
channels (★1, ★2, ★3).
L If two or more Memory channels are not
designated as a Select Memory channels, the
Select Memory scan does not start.
D Memory scan operation
1. Push
V/M
to select the Memory mode.
2. Open the SCAN screen.
MENU
» SCAN
3. Touch [MEMO] to start the Memory scan.
Blinks
Blinks
[SEL No.] is displayed instead of [∂F SPAN].
While Memory scanning
L “MEMO SCAN” and decimal points blink while
scanning.
L [SEL No.] is displayed instead of [∂F] while scanning.
4. Touch [MEMO] to cancel the scan.
5. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
10
SCANS
10-5
D Select Memory scan operation
1. Start the Memory scan.
L See steps 1 ~ 3 in “Memory scan operation” (p.10-4)
for details.
2. While scanning, touch [SEL No.] to select the
Select scan number.
L Each time you touch [SEL No.], “★1,” “★2,” “★3,” and
“★1,2,3” are alternately displayed.
 ★1: Channels specied as ★1 are scanned.
★2: Channels specied as ★2 are scanned.
★3: Channels specied as ★3 are scanned.
★1,2,3:
Channels specied as ★1, ★2, or ★3 are
scanned.
3. While scanning, touch [SELECT] to switch to the
Select Memory scan.
Blinks
Blinks
While Memory scanning
While Select Memory scanning
L While Select Memory scanning, “SELECT MEMORY
SCAN” blinks instead of “MEMORY SCAN.”
L Each time you touch [SELECT], the Memory scan
and the Select Memory scan are switched.
4. Touch [MEMO] to cancel the scan.
5. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
Memory scan and Select Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued)
D Setting Select Memory channel
1. Open the SCAN screen.
L See steps 1 ~ 2 in “Memory scan operation” (p.10-4)
for details.
2. Push
▲
or
▼
to select the desired Memory
channel to be set as the Select Memory channel.
3. Touch [SELECT] to set the Select scan number.
L Each time you touch [SELECT], “★1,” “★2,” “★3,” and
“(no icon)” are alternately displayed.
4. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
Displayed
D Canceling all Select Memory channel
settings
1. Open the SCAN screen.
L See steps 1 ~ 2 in “Memory scan operation” (p.10-4)
for details.
2. Touch [SELECT] for 1 second.
• Opens the SELECT ALL CLEAR screen.
3. Touch the desired option to clear all Select
memory channel settings.
4. Touch [YES] to cancel the Select setting.
5. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
10
SCANS
10-6
∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO and Memory modes)
∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan
ScanScan
–∂
F frequency +
∂
F frequency
Start frequency
Jump
Repeatedly scans within the ∂F span area.
The scan starts from the center frequency.
L In ne scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed
decreases when the squelch opens, but the
transceiver keeps scanning. The scan tuning step
changes to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.
D ∂F scan operation
1. Push
V/M
to select the VFO or Memory mode.
2. Open the SCAN screen.
MENU
» SCAN
3. Touch [∂F SPAN] several times until the desired
span is selected.
• Options: ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz,
±100 kHz, ±500 kHz, or ±1 MHz
4. Set the center frequency.
• In the VFO mode: Rotate
MAIN DIAL
.
• In the Memory mode:
Push
▲
or
▼
to select the
desired Memory channel.
5. Touch [∂F] to start the ∂F scan.
Blinks
Blinks
While ∂F scanning
L “∂F SCAN” and decimal points blink while scanning.
6. Touch [∂F] to cancel the scan.
7. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
D Fine ∂F scan operation
1. Start the ∂F scan.
L See steps 1 ~ 5 in “∂F scan operation” to the left for
details.
2. While ∂F scanning, touch [FINE] to switch to the
File ∂F scan.
Blinks
Blinks
While ∂F scanning
While Fine ∂F scanning
L While Fine ∂F scanning, “FINE ∂FSCAN” blinks
instead of “∂F SCAN.”
L Each time you touch [FINE], the ∂F scan and the
Fine ∂F scan are switched.
3. Touch [∂F] to cancel the scan.
4. To close the SCAN screen, push
EXIT
.
10
SCANS
10-7
Tone scan operation
By monitoring a signal on an HF/6 m repeater input
frequency, the transceiver can determine the tone
frequency required to access the repeater.
1. While receiving a signal in the FM mode, push
FUNCTION
to open the FUNCTION screen.
2. Touch [TONE] for 1 second.
• Opens the TONE FREQUENCY screen.
3. Touch [REPEATER TONE] or [T-SQL TONE].
• Checks the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch
frequency.
4. Touch [T-SCAN] to start the Tone scan.
Blinks
While Tone scanning
InformationL
• The selected tone frequencies are scanned, and
“SCAN” blinks under the frequency readout.
• The audio is muted.
• The scan speed is slow when the squelch is
open. And the speed is fast when the squelch is
closed.
5. When the tone frequency is detected, the tone
scan pauses.
• The tone frequency is temporarily set in the Tone
memory.
6. Touch [T-SCAN] to cancel the scan.
7. To close the TONE FREQUENCY screen, push
EXIT
.
11-1
Section 11 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
About the internal antenna tuner ...........................................11-2
Internal antenna tuner operation ...........................................11-2
D Manual tuning ................................................................11-2
D PTT Tuner start ..............................................................11-2
About the external antenna tuner ..........................................11-3
D Using the AH-4 or AH-740 .............................................11-3
D Using a user supplied antenna tuner .............................11-3
Emergency mode (Tuner) ...................................................... 11-4
11
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
11-2
About the internal antenna tuner
The internal automatic antenna tuner automatically
matches the transceiver to the antenna within the
range of 16.7 ~ 150 Ω (SWR of less than 3:1).
When the tuner has matched an antenna over some
period of operating time, latching relays of up to 100
combinations have been memorized as preset points.
If the frequency is tuned over ± 1.5% of the current
memorized frequency point, the tuner uses the relay
combinations of the next memorized point (if it is
within ± 1.5% of the new frequency). If there are no
memorized points with the range, the tuner switches
to bypass.
• When you install a new antenna, or you want to
change the antenna settings, you can clear the all
of the internal antenna tuner preset points with the
“<<Preset Memory Clear>>” item on the TUNER set
screen. (p. 12-5)
MENU
»
SET > Function > Tuner >
<<Preset Memory Clear>>
• You can select whether or not to save the internal
antenna tuner’s status after pushing
TUNER
on each
band in the “[TUNER] Switch” item on the TUNER
set screen. (p. 12-5)
MENU
»
SET > Function > Tuner >
[TUNER] Switch
NOTE: When the transceiver receives a strong physical
shock, some of the internal latching relays may unlatch. In
that case, push
TUNER
to turn OFF the tuner, then turn
ON again to reset all the latching relays.
Internal antenna tuner operation
1. Push
TUNER
to turn ON the internal antenna
tuner.
• “TUNE” is displayed when the tuner is ON.
2. Tune the antenna.
L To tune the antenna, see “Manual tuning” or “PTT
Tuner start” below.
D Manual tuning
You can manually tune the antenna before
transmitting for the rst time.
1. Hold down
TUNER
for 1 second to start manual
tuning.
• The tuner reduces the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after
2~3 seconds of tuning.
L While tuning, a side tone is heard and “TUNE” blinks
red.
2. After tuning, “TUNE” is displayed.
L If the tuner cannot tune, “TUNE” disappears and the
tuning circuit is automatically bypassed
D PTT Tuner start
The tuner is always activated when PTT is pushed
after the frequency is changed (more than 1% from
last-tuned frequency). This function tunes the antenna
for the rst transmission on a new frequency.
L This function can be turned ON in the “PTT Start”
item of the TUNER set screen. (p. 12-5)
MENU
» SET > Function > Tuner > PTT Start
NOTE: If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1, hold down
TUNER
for 1 second to start manual tuning.
If the tuner cannot tune the antenna
• Repeat manual tuning several times.
• Even if the tuner cannot tune the antenna on the rst
tuning, it may success at the second tuning.
• Some antennas, especially for the low bands, have a
narrow bandwidth. These antennas may not tune at
the edge of their bandwidth, therefore, tune such an
antenna as follows:
(Example):
Suppose you have an antenna which has an SWR of
1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1 at 3.8 MHz.
1. Set 3.55 MHz, and hold down
TUNER
for 1
second to start manual tuning.
2. Set 3.80 MHz, and hold down
TUNER
for 1
second to start manual tuning.
11
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
11-3
About an external antenna tuner
The optional AH-4 antenna tuner matches the IC-
7300 to a long wire antenna more than 7 m/23 ft long
(3.5 MHz and above).
The optional AH-740 automatic tuning antenna
covers 2.5 to 30 MHz range with a supplied whip
antenna.
During mobile operation, the optional AH-2b antenna
element matches the IC-7300 to a whip antenna more
than 2.5 m/8.2 ft long (7 ~ 50 MHz).
R DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE!
NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning or
transmitting. Always install it in a secure place.
NEVER operate the AH-4 or AH-740 without an antenna
connected. The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.
D Using the AH-4 or AH-740
1. Turn ON the transceiver.
• “TUNE” is displayed.
L Each time you push
TUNER
, “TUNE” is displayed
or goes out, and the AH-4 or AH-740 is turned ON or
OFF (bypassed).
2. Hold down
TUNER
for 1 second to start manual
tuning.
• The tuner reduces the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after
2~3 seconds of tuning.
L While tuning, a side tone is heard and “TUNE” blinks
red.
L If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1
after 20 seconds of tuning, “TUNE” goes out.
3. After tuning, “TUNE” is displayed.
L When the long wire antenna cannot be tuned, “TUNE”
goes out. In that case, the AH-4 is bypassed and the
wire is directly connected.
NOTE: When the wire antenna cannot be tuned, conrm
wire length and connection.
Note that the AH-4 cannot tune a wire that is a ½λ long or
on a multiple of that frequency.
D Using an external antenna tuner
When you use a non-Icom external antenna tuner,
be sure to turn OFF the internal antenna tuner before
connecting the external antenna tuner.
Otherwise, the tuning may fail because both antenna
tuners (internal and external) will simultaneously start
tuning.
See the antenna tuner’s instruction manual for details.
NOTE: Be sure not to connect the antenna tuner without
an antenna connected. This could damage the transceiver
or external antenna tuner.
TIP:
• When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, be sure to
conrm the SWR is less than 3:1 (2.5:1 for 50 MHz), and
then start to tune again.
• If the SWR is not reduced to 1.5:1 after retuning, see “If
the tuner cannot tune the antenna” (p. 13-2) for details.
11
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
11-4
Emergency mode (Tuner)
The Emergency mode (Tuner) enables you to use the
internal antenna tuner in an emergency situation, but
limits the maximum output power to 50 W.
In an emergency situation, where the only antenna
you have has a high SWR, you can use the antenna
tuner even if the SWR is more than 3:1.
1. Open the EMERGENCY screen.
MENU
» SET > Others > Emergency
2. Touch “Tuner.”
3. Touch [OK].
4. Touch “<<Restart to SET>>” to restart the
transceiver.
“✓” is inserted.
: Displayed when the internal
antenna tuner is OFF.
: Blinks while tuning.
: Displayed when the internal
antenna tuner is ON.
• The transceiver enters the
Emergency mode (Tuner).
12-1
Section 12 SET MODE
Set mode description ............................................................ 12-2
D Entering the Set mode .................................................. 12-2
Tone Control ......................................................................... 12-3
Function ................................................................................ 12-4
Connectors ........................................................................... 12-7
Display ................................................................................ 12-10
Time Set ..............................................................................12-11
SD Card ...............................................................................12-11
Others ..................................................................................12-11
12
SET MODE
12-2
Set mode description
D Entering the Set mode
1. Push
MENU
.
• Opens the MENU screen.
MENU
2. Touch [SET].
• Opens the SET screen.
3. Rotate
MULTI
to select the desired item.
L You can also select the item by touching [Ù] or [Ú] in
the screen.
Rotate
4. Push
MULTI
to go to the next tree level.
L You can also go to the next tree level by directly
touching the desired item in the screen.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to open the desired item’s
setting screen.
LTo go back the previous tree level, push
EXIT
.
You can use the Set mode to set infrequently changed
values or function settings.
TIP: The Set mode is constructed in a tree structure.
You may go to the next tree level, or go back a level,
depending on the selected item.
6. Rotate
MULTI
to select the desired option, and
then push
MULTI
to set it.
InformationL
• You can also select the option by directly touching the
option or [▲] or [▼] in the screen.
• When you continuously set other items in the same
tree level, repeat step 6.
• When you continuously set other item in the different
tree level, push
EXIT
to go back the previous tree
level.
TIP: How to reset to the default setting
Touching the item or its option for 1 second displays the
Quick menu, and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
LTo close the Quick menu, push
EXIT
.
7. To close the SET screen, push
EXIT
several times.
12
SET MODE
12-3
Tone Control
SSB RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – – – –)
Sets the receive audio high-pass lter and low-pass
lter cutoff frequencies in 100 Hz steps.
Selectable ranges:
• HPF: 100 ~ 2000 Hz
• LPF: 500 ~ 2400 Hz
L If this item is set, the “SSB RX Bass” and “SSB RX
Treble” items are automatically set to “0.”
SSB RX Bass (Default: 0)
SSB RX Treble (Default: 0)
Sets the bass or treble level of the receive audio.
• Range: –5 ~ +5
AM RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – – – –)
Sets the receive audio high-pass lter or low-pass
lter cutoff frequencies in 100 Hz steps.
Selectable ranges:
• HPF: 100 ~ 2000 Hz
• LPF: 500 ~ 2400 Hz
L If this item is set, the “AM RX Bass” and “AM RX
Treble” items are automatically set to “0.”
AM RX Bass (Default: 0)
AM RX Treble (Default: 0)
Sets the bass or treble level of the receive audio.
• Range: –5 ~ +5
FM RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – – – –)
Sets the receive audio high-pass lter or low-pass
lter cutoff frequencies in 100 Hz steps.
Selectable ranges:
• HPF: 100 ~ 2000 Hz
• LPF: 500 ~ 2400 Hz
L If this item is set, the “FM RX Bass” and “FM RX
Treble” items are automatically set to “0.”
FM RX Bass (Default: 0)
FM RX Treble (Default: 0)
Sets the bass or treble level of the receive audio.
• Range: –5 ~ +5
CW RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – – – –)
RTTY RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – – – –)
Sets the receive audio high-pass lter or low-pass
lter cutoff frequencies in 100 Hz steps.
Selectable ranges:
• HPF: 100 ~ 2000 Hz
• LPF: 500 ~ 2400 Hz
SSB TX Bass (Default: 0)
SSB TX Treble (Default: 0)
Sets the bass or treble level of the receive audio.
• Range: –5 ~ +5
SSB TBW (WIDE) (Default: 100 – 2900)
SSB TBW (MID) (Default: 300 – 2700)
SSB TBW (NAR) (Default: 500 – 2500)
Sets the transmission pass bandwidth of wide, mid,
or narrow, by changing the lower and higher cutoff
frequencies.
• Lower frequency: 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz
• Higher frequency: 2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz
AM TX Bass (Default: 0)
AM TX Treble (Default: 0)
Sets the bass or treble level of the transmit
audio
.
• Range: –5 ~ +5
FM TX Bass (Default: 0)
FM TX Treble (Default: 0)
Sets the bass or treble level of the transmit
audio
.
• Range: –5 ~ +5
12
SET MODE
12-4
Function
Beep Level (Default: 50%)
Sets the beep output level.
• Range: 0 ~ 100%
L If the “Beep (Conrmation)” item is set to “OFF,” no
beep sounds.
Beep Level Limit (Default: ON)
Selects whether or not to limit the volume up to the
specied level.
• OFF: Does not limit the volume level.
• ON: Limits the volume level.
Further rotation of
AF RF/SQL
(inner) does not
increase the level.
Beep (Conrmation) (Default: ON)
Turns the Conrmation beep ON or OFF.
• OFF: Does not sound the beep.
• ON: Sounds the beep when a key is pushed.
• If the “Beep Level” item is set to “0%,” no beep sounds.
Band Edge Beep (Default: ON (Default))
Turns the Band Edge beep ON or OFF.
• OFF:
Does not sound the Band Edge beep.
• ON(Default):
The Band Edge beep sounds on the band edge.
• ON(User):
The beep, which is selected in the User Band Edge
screen, sounds. (p. 3-7)
• ON(User) & TX Limit:
The beep, which is selected in the User Band Edge
screen, sounds.
Transmit is limited to the range between the upper
and lower band edges. (p. 3-7)
InformationL
• If the “Beep Level” item is set to “0%,” no beep sounds.
• When you tune into an amateur band’s frequency
range, the Band Edge high beep sounds.
• When you tune out of an amateur band’s frequency
range, the Band Edge low beep sounds.
RF/SQL Control (Default: RF+SQL)
Set the
AF RF/SQL
(outer) control operation.
• Auto: While in the AM or FM mode, operates as
only a squelch control.
While in the SSB, CW or RTTY mode,
operates as only an RF gain control.
• SQL: Operates as only a squelch control.
LRF gain is xed at maximum sensitivity.
• RF+SQL: Operates as an RF gain control, and a
noise squelch* or S-meter squelch.
*Only in the FM mode.
When using as an RF gain/squelch control
When using as an RF gain control
(Squelch is xed open: SSB, CW, RTTY only)
When using as a squelch control
(RF gain is xed at maximum.)
MF Band ATT (Default: ON)
Turns the MF Band Attenuator function ON or OFF.
This function adds approximately 16 dB of attenuation
to prevent a desired signal from becoming distorted
when very strong MF band signals are received.
This function is usable when the frequency is set
to between 0.03000 and 1.59999 MHz, for only
receiving.
L When you receive a weak signal on the MF band,
select “OFF.”
L The 16 dB of the MF band attenuation is added to
any other attenuation value that you have set.
Noise squelch (FM mode)
S-meter squelch
adjustable range
Maximum
RF gain
Maximum
S-meter squelch
Minimum
RF gain
RF gain
adjustable range
Squelch is open
is displayed
Maximum
RF gain range
Minimum
RF gain
RF gain
adjustable range
is displayed
Maximum RF gain
Noise squelch (FM mode)
S-meter squelch
threshold
S-meter squelch
adjustable range
Maximum
S-meter squelch
Squelch is open
Noise squelch
threshold
12
SET MODE
12-5
Function (Continued)
TX Delay HF (Default: OFF)
TX Delay 50M (Default: OFF)
TX Delay 70M* (Default: OFF)
Sets the TX delay time on the HF, 50 or 70 MHz band.
• Options: OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms, or 30ms
L If an external equipment’s rise time is slower than
that of the IC-7300, a reected wave is produced
and it may damage the IC-7300. To prevent this, set
the appropriate delay time so that no reected wave
is produced.
LSelect “OFF” for no rise speed.
* Depending on the transceiver’s version, this item may not
be displayed.
Time-Out Timer (CI-V) (Default: OFF)
Sets the Time-out Timer for CI-V operation.
This setting is valid only transmitting initiated by a
CI-V command or pushing
TRANSMIT
.
• Options: OFF, 3, 5, 10, 20 or 30 minutes
LSelect “OFF” for no time limit.
Quick SPLIT (Default: ON)
Turns the Quick Split function ON or OFF.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Turns ON the function.
FM SPLIT Offset (HF) (Default: –0.100 MHz)
FM SPLIT Offset (50M) (Default: –0.500 MHz)
Sets the frequency offset for the Split function in the
FM mode on the HF or 50 MHz band.
• Range: –9.999 ~ +9.999 MHz
SPLIT LOCK (Default: OFF)
Turns the Split Lock function ON or OFF.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Turns ON the function.
You can use
MAIN DIAL
to adjust the transmit
frequency while holding down
XFC
, even
while the Dial Lock function is ON.
[TUNER] Switch (Default: Auto)
Selects whether or not to save the internal antenna
tuner’s status after pushing
TUNER
on each band.
• Manual: The internal antenna tuner’s status is saved
on all bands.
• Auto: The internal antenna tuner’s status is saved
on each band.
PTT Start (Default: OFF)
Turns the PTT Start Tuning function ON or OFF.
• OFF: Starts to tune only when
TUNER
is ON.
• ON: When
TUNER
is ON and the operating
frequency is shifted more than 1%, starts to
tune when you push PTT.
<<Preset Memory Clear>>
Clears the all of the internal antenna tuner preset
points.
RTTY Mark Frequency (Default: 2125)
Selects the RTTY mark frequency.
• Options: 1275, 1615, or 2125 (Hz)
L When the internal RTTY decoder is used, 2125 Hz
is automatically selected.
RTTY Shift Width (Default: 170)
Selects the RTTY shift width.
• Options: 170, 200, or 425 (Hz)
L When the internal RTTY decoder is used, 170 Hz is
automatically selected.
RTTY Keying Polarity (Default: Normal)
Selects the RTTY keying polarity.
• Normal: Key open/close = Mark/Space
• Reverse: Key open/close = Space/Mark
SPEECH Language (Default: English)
Selects the speech language.
• English: Speech in English.
• Japanese: Speech in Japanese.
SPEECH Speed (Default: Fast)
Selects the speech speed.
• Slow: Speech speed is slow.
• Fast: Speech speed is fast.
S-Level SPEECH (Default: ON)
Turns the S-meter level announcement ON or OFF.
• OFF: The S-meter level is not announced.
• ON:
The S-meter level and frequency are announced.
MODE SPEECH (Default: OFF)
Turns the operating mode announcement ON or OFF.
• OFF: The operating mode is not announced.
• ON: The operating mode is announced when the
mode is changed.
12
SET MODE
12-6
Function (Continued)
SPEECH Level (Default: 50%)
Sets the Voice Synthesizer audio output level.
• Range: 0 ~ 100%
[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch (Default: SPEECH/LOCK)
Selects
SPEECH
action.
• SPEECH/LOCK: Pushing
SPEECH
turns ON the Voice
Synthesizer function.
Holding down
SPEECH
turns the Lock
function ON or OFF.
• LOCK/SPEECH: Pushing
SPEECH
turns the Lock
function ON or OFF.
Holding down
SPEECH
turns ON the
Voice Synthesizer function.
Lock Function (Default: MAIN DIAL)
This function electronically locks
MAIN DIAL
or
the panel display* to prevent setting changes by
accidental operation.
* Keys and dials are also locked except for
AF RF/SQL
,
AF RF/SQL
,
, and
SPEECH
.
• MAIN DIAL:
MAIN DIAL
is disabled.
L
MAIN DIAL
functions only when selecting
an item in the Set mode or Quick menu.
• PANEL: The panel operation is disabled.
Memo Pad Quantity (Default: 5)
Sets the number of memo pad channels.
• 5: 5 channels.
• 10: 10 channels.
MAIN DIAL Auto TS (Default: High)
Sets the Auto Tuning Step function for
MAIN DIAL
.
When rapidly rotating
MAIN DIAL
, the tuning step is
automatically changed according to the rotation speed.
• OFF: Auto tuning step is turned OFF.
• LOW: Approximately 2 times faster.
• HIGH: Approximately 5 times faster when the tuning
step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps.
Approximately 2 times faster when the tuning
step is set to 5 kHz or larger steps.
MIC Up/Down Speed (Default: Fast)
Sets the response speed of [∫]/[√] on the supplied
microphone while holding down.
• Slow: Slow speed (25 tuning steps/second).
• Fast: Fast speed (50 tuning steps/second).
Quick RIT/∂TX Clear (Default: OFF)
Selects the operation of
CLEAR
for the RIT and ∂TX
functions.
• OFF: Clears when
CLEAR
is held down for 1
second.
• ON: Clears when
CLEAR
is pushed.
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) (Default: Auto/Manual)
[NOTCH] Switch (AM) (Default: Auto/Manual)
Selects the notch function used in the SSB or AM
mode.
• Auto: Only the Auto notch lter.
• Manual: Only the Manual notch lter
• Auto/Manual: Both the Auto and Manual notch lters.
SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning (Default: OFF)
Turns the Displayed Frequency Shift function ON or
OFF.
This function automatically shifts the frequency to
match the CW pitch when the operating mode is
toggled between SSB and CW.
• OFF: Stays on the frequency even when the
operating mode is toggled between SSB and
CW.
• ON: Shifts the frequency when the operating mode
is toggled between SSB and CW, to keep
receiving the signal.
CW Normal Side (Default: LSB)
Selects the carrier point in the CW normal mode.
• LSB: The LSB side.
• USB: The USB side.
12
SET MODE
12-7
Function (Continued)
Screen Capture [POWER] SW (Default: OFF)
Assigns the Screen Capture function to
.
• OFF:
POWER
does not act as the Screen Capture
key.
• ON:
POWER
acts as the Screen Capture key.
Screen Capture File Type (Default: PNG)
Selects the le format for the Screen Capture function.
• Options: PNG or BMP
TIP: When the “Screen Capture [POWER] SW” item is
“ON,” you can capture the screen in the following way:
1. Set a desired screen.
2. Push
to capture the screen.
• The captured screen is saved onto the SD card in
the selected data format.
L You can display the captured screen on the
transceiver’s display. See page 13-5 for details.
Keyboard Type (Default: Full Keyboard)
Sets the keyboard entry type to Ten-key or Full
Keyboard.
• Ten key: Ten-key type
• Full Keyboard: Full Keyboard type
L You can enter upper case letters, lower
case letters, numbers, some symbols
and spaces with this type.
L When the edit screen is displayed, push
QUICK
to
display the Quick menu.
You can select the desired keyboard type.
Calibration Marker (Default: OFF)
Turns the reference frequency calibration marker ON
or OFF.
• OFF: Turns OFF the marker.
• ON: Turns ON the marker.
REF Adjust
Adjusts the internal reference frequency.
• Range: 0 ~ 100%
NOTE:
• The default setting of “REF Adjust” may differ slightly,
depending on the transceiver’s version.
• Before performing a frequency calibration, you have to
set “Calibration Marker” to ON.
Connectors
ACC/USB Output Select (Default: AF)
Selects the signal output from [ACC] and [USB].
• AF: AF signal is output.
• IF: A 12 kHz IF signal is output.
L You can listen to the Digital Radio Mondiale (DRM)
broadcast with the application software receiver that
is installed into your PC.
ACC/USB AF Output Level (Default: 50%)
Sets the AF output level of [ACC] and [USB].
• Range: 0 ~ 100%
ACC/USB AF SQL (Default: OFF (OPEN))
Selects whether or not to output the audio from [ACC]
and [USB], according to the squelch level.
The same audio signals are output from [USB] and
[ACC].
• OFF(OPEN): The squelch is always opened
regardless of the transceiver’s squelch
level.
• ON: The squelch opens and closes,
according to the transceiver’s squelch
level.
ACC/USB AF Beep/Speech... Output (Default: OFF)
Sets the Beep and Speech audio output status of
[ACC] and [USB].
• OFF: The beep and speech audio are not output
from [ACC] and [USB].
• ON: The beep and speech audio are output from
[ACC] and [USB].
L You should set the “ACC/USB AF SQL” item to “AF.”
L The beep level is limited when the “Beep Level
Limit” item is “ON.”
ACC/USB IF Output Level (Default: 50%)
Sets the IF output level of [ACC] and [USB].
• Range: 0 ~ 100%
ACC MOD Level (Default: 50%)
Sets the modulation input level of [ACC].
• Range: 0 ~ 100%
USB MOD Level (Default: 50%)
Sets the modulation input level of [USB].
• Range: 0 ~ 100%
12
SET MODE
12-8
DATA OFF MOD (Default: MIC,ACC)
Selects the connector(s) to input the modulation signal
when the data mode is OFF.
• MIC: Uses the signal from [MIC].
• ACC: Uses the signal from [ACC] (pin 11).
• MIC,ACC: Uses the signal from [MIC] and [ACC]
(pin 11).
• USB: Uses the signal from [USB].
DATA MOD (Default: ACC)
Selects the connector(s) to input the modulation signal
when the data mode is ON.
• MIC: Uses the signal from [MIC].
• ACC: Uses the signal from [ACC] (pin 11).
• MIC,ACC: Uses the signal from [MIC] and [ACC]
(pin 11).
• USB: Uses the signal from [USB].
External Keypad VOICE (Default: OFF)
Enables voice memory transmission using an external
keypad.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Pushing one of the external keypad switches
transmits the content of voice memory (T1 ~
T4). (SSB/AM/FM mode)
L Hold down the switch for 1 second to repeatedly
transmit.
External Keypad KEYER (Default: OFF)
Enables keyer memory transmission using an external
keypad.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Pushing one of the external keypad switches,
transmits the content of keyer memory (M1 ~
M4). (CW mode)
L Hold down the switch for 1 second to repeatedly
transmit.
External Keypad RTTY (Default: OFF)
Enables RTTY memory transmission using an
external keypad.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Pushing one of the external keypad switches,
transmits the entered RTTY memory (RT1
~ RT4). (When the RTTY decode screen is
opened in the RTTY mode)
CI-V Baud Rate (Default: Auto)
Selects the CI-V data transfer rate.
• Options: 4800, 9600, 19200 (bps) or Auto
L When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is
automatically set according to the data rate of the
connected controller.
CI-V Address (Default: 94h)
Selects the CI-V address.
• Range: 02h ~ 94h ~ DFh
L“94h” is the default address of IC-7300.
CI-V Transceive (Default: ON)
Turns the Transceive function ON or OFF.
• OFF: The status is not output.
• ON: The status is output.
When you change a setting on the
transceiver, the same change is automatically
set on other connected transceivers or
receivers, and vice versa.
CI-V USB→REMOTE Transceive Address (Default: 00h)
Sets the address used to remotely control the
transceiver or receiver using the optional RS-BA1,
through the [USB] port.
The external equipment control signal is output from
the [REMOTE] port.
• Range: 00h ~ DFh
TIP: When multiple devices are connected.
The default transceive address is “00h.” To control
dedicated equipment (example IC-PW1) when several
devices are connected, set the same CI-V address.
CI-V Output (for ANT) (Default: OFF)
Enables outputting the antenna controller status
(frequency and so on) from the [REMOTE] port.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Outputs the status.
L Address “01h” is reserved.
The usable addresses are limited to 02h ~ DFh.
CI-V USB Port (Default: Link to [REMOTE])
Selects the internal connection type between the
[USB] and [REMOTE] CI-V ports.
• Link to [REMOTE]:
The [USB] and [REMOTE] CI-V ports are
internally connected.
• Unlink from [REMOTE]:
The [USB] and [REMOTE] CI-V ports are not
internally connected.
Each port functions independently.
(duplex communication can be made.)
Connectors (Continued)
12
SET MODE
12-9
Connectors (Continued)
CI-V USB Baud Rate (Default: Auto)
Selects the CI-V data transfer rate when remotely
controlling the IC-7300 through the
[USB]
CI-V port
.
• Options: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
(bps), or Auto
L When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is
automatically set according to the data rate of
external controller.
L This setting is valid only when the “CI-V USB Port”
item is set to “Unlink from [REMOTE].”
CI-V USB Echo Back (Default: OFF)
Turns the Data Echo Back function ON or OFF, when
remotely controlling the IC-7300 through the [USB]
CI-V port.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• ON: Turns ON the function.
L This setting is valid only when the “CI-V USB Port”
item is set to “Unlink from [REMOTE].”
USB Serial Function (Default: CI-V)
Selects the signal output from [USB].
• CI-V: A CI-V command is output.
• RTTY Decode: An RTTY decoded signal is output.
RTTY Decode Baud Rate (Default: 9600)
Selects the data transfer rate (Baud rate) of decoded
RTTY signals.
• Options: 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 (bps)
TIP: About the “USB SEND,” “USB Keying (CW),” and
“USB Keying (RTTY)” items
L When you operate RTTY or CW through your PC’s USB
port and your IC-7300, you may not be able to send
“SEND” or “Keying” signals until a few seconds after
you connect the USB cable.
L When you operate RTTY or CW through your PC’s USB
port and the IC-7300, and connect a second transceiver
to another PC USB port, a short “SEND” or “Keying”
signal will be sent from the rst transceiver. Therefore,
we recommend that you do not connect a second
transceiver to a USB port of the same PC. Or, always
turn OFF the transceiver power before you connect a
USB cable.
USB SEND (Default: OFF)
You can control transmit and receive from the PC
through the USB port.
Selects the control port to be used for communication
between the IC-7300 and PC, according to the
operating condition.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• DTR: Uses the DTR terminal on the CI-V (PC) side.
• RTS: Uses the RTS terminal on the CI-V (PC) side.
L You cannot select the terminal which is already
selected in the “USB Keying (CW)” or “USB Keying
(RTTY)” item.
USB Keying (CW) (Default: OFF)
You can control transmit, receive and keying from the
PC, through the USB port.
Selects the control port to be used for communication
between the IC-7300 and PC, according to the
operating condition.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• DTR: Uses the DTR terminal on the CI-V (PC) side.
• RTS: Uses the RTS terminal on the CI-V (PC) side.
L You cannot select the terminal which is already
selected in the “USB SEND” or “USB Keying
(RTTY)” item.
USB Keying (RTTY) (Default: OFF)
You can control transmit, receive and RTTY (FSK)
from the PC, through the USB port.
Selects the control port to be used for communication
between the IC-7300 and PC according to the
operating condition.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• DTR: Uses the DTR terminal on the CI-V side.
• RTS: Uses the RTS terminal on the CI-V side.
L You cannot select the terminal which is already
selected in the “USB SEND” or “USB Keying (CW)”
item.
12
SET MODE
12-10
Display
LCD Backlight (Default: 50%)
Sets the LCD backlight brightness.
• Range: 0 (dark) ~ 100% (bright)
Display Type (Default: A)
Sets the display background type to A or B. (p. 13-3)
• A: Display background color is black.
• B: Display background color is blue.
Display Font (Default: Basic)
Selects the font for the frequency readout.
• Options: Basic or Round
Meter Peak Hold (Default: ON)
Turns the Meter peak hold function ON or OFF.
Memory Name (Default: ON)
Turns the Memory name display in the Memory mode
ON or OFF.
• OFF: Memory name is not displayed, even if
entered.
• ON: The entered Memory name is displayed below
the frequency display.
MN-Q Popup (MN OFF→ON) (Default: ON)
Selects whether or not to display the Manual Notch
lter width when you select the Manual Notch.
• OFF: The Manual Notch lter width is not displayed.
• ON: The Manual Notch lter width is displayed.
BW Popup (PBT) (Default: ON)
Selects whether or not to display the PBT shift value
while rotating
TWIN PBT
CLR
.
• OFF: The the PBT shift value is not displayed.
• ON: The the PBT shift value is displayed.
BW Popup (FIL) (Default: ON)
Selects whether or not to display the IF lter width and
shift value when you switch the IF lter by touching
the lter icon.
• OFF: The IF lter width and shift value are not
displayed.
• ON:
The IF lter width and shift value are displayed.
Screen Saver (Default: 60min)
Sets the Screen Saver function.
This function activates when no operation is
performed for a preset period of time.
• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
• 15min: Activates after 15 minutes with no operation.
• 30min: Activates after 30 minutes with no operation
• 60min: Activates after 60 minutes with no operation
Opening Message (Default: ON)
Selects whether or not to display the opening
message at power ON.
• OFF: Opening message is not displayed.
• ON: Opening message is displayed.
My Call
Displays an opening message of up to 10 characters.
(Example: your call sign) (p. 13-5)
Power ON Check (Default: ON)
Selects whether or not to display the RF Power level
at power ON.
• OFF: The RF Power level is not displayed.
• ON: The RF Power level is displayed.
Display Language (Default: English)
Sets the display language.
• English: Displays in English.
• Japanese: Displays in Japanese.
12
SET MODE
12-11
Time Set
Date (Default: 2000/01/01)
Sets the date (Year/Month/Day).
(The day of the week is automatically set.)
• Range: Year 2000 ~ 2099, Month/Day 1-1 ~ 12-31
Time (Default: 0:00)
Sets the current time.
(The time is displayed in the 24 hour format.)
• Sets the current time.
UTC Offset (Default: ± 0:00)
Sets the UTC offset time.
• Range: –14:00 to +14:00 (in 5 minute steps)
SD Card
Load Setting
Selects the saved data le to load.
L See “Loading the saved data les onto an SD card”
(p. 8-6) for details.
Save Setting
Saves the setting data onto an SD card.
L See “Saving the setting data onto an SD card”
(p. 8-4) for details.
SD Card Info
Displays the SD card capacity and the time remaining
for voice recording.
L See “Displaying the information” (p. 8-7) for details.
Screen Capture View
Displays the selected screen capture.
L See “Screen Capture function” (p. 13-5) for details.
Firmware Update
Displays the Firmware Update mode.
L See “Updating the rmware” (p. 15-5) for details.
Format
Formats the SD card.
If you use a brand new SD card, be sure to format it.
L See “Formatting an SD card” (p. 8-3) for details.
Unmount
Unmounts the SD card.
Before you remove a card when the transceiver is ON,
be sure to electrically unmount it.
Otherwise the data may be corrupted or deleted.
L See “Unmounting an SD card” (p. 8-3) for details.
Others
Version
Displays the transceiver rmware’s version number.
Touch Screen Calibration
Touch to adjust the touch screen.
L See “Touch screen calibration function” (p. 14-3) for
details.
Partial Reset
Resets operating settings to their default values (VFO
frequency, VFO settings, menu contents) without
clearing the items below:
• Memory channel contents
• MY Call
• Memory Keyer
• RTTY memory
• User Band Edge
• REF Adjust
• Fixed Edges
L See “Resetting” (p. 14-4) for details.
All Reset
Clears all data and returns all settings to their factory
defaults.
Memory channel contents, lter setting and so on
will all be cleared, so you will need to rewrite your
operating settings.
L See “Resetting” (p. 14-4) for details.
Emergency
Sets the Emergency function.
This function enables you to use the internal antenna
tuner in an emergency situation, but limits the
maximum output power to 50 W.
L See “Emergency mode (Tuner)” (p. 11-4) for details.
13-1
Section 13 OTHER FUNCTIONS
Adjusting the main dial friction .............................................. 13-2
Using the SPEECH function ................................................. 13-2
Measuring SWR ................................................................... 13-2
D Spot measurement ....................................................... 13-2
D Plot measurement ......................................................... 13-3
Selecting the display type and font ....................................... 13-3
D Selecting the display background ................................. 13-3
D Selecting the display font .............................................. 13-3
Protection function ................................................................ 13-4
REF adjustment .................................................................... 13-4
Displaying my call sign ......................................................... 13-5
Screen Capture function ....................................................... 13-5
D Capturing a screen ....................................................... 13-5
D Viewing the captured screen......................................... 13-5
13
OTHER FUNCTIONS
13-2
Adjusting the main dial friction
You can adjust the friction of
MAIN DIAL
to suit your
preference.
The friction adjustor is located under
MAIN DIAL
.
See the illustration below.
Slide the adjustor for a comfortable friction level
while continuously and evenly turning the dial in one
direction.
Using the SPEECH function
The transceiver has a built-in Voice synthesizer to
announce the operating frequency, mode, as well as
the S-meter level in a clear electronically-generated
voice, in either English or Japanese.
First, set the following items in the SPEECH screen.
MENU
» SET > Function > SPEECH
• SPEECH Language
• SPEECH Speed
• S-Level SPEECH
• MODE SPEECH
• SPEECH Level
z Push
SPEECH
to announce the currently selected
frequency, mode*, and S-meter* level.
* If set to ON, the Mode and S-meter level are
announced.
Measuring SWR
The transceiver has a high-performance SWR
meter. This meter displays a stable measurement in
real time, even if the transmit output power varies
frequently, such as during an SSB mode operation.
You can measure the SWR of an antenna itself
through the internal antenna tuner.
There are 2 ways to measure SWR, one is spot
measurement and the other is plot measurement.
D Spot measurement
1. Push
TUNER
to turn OFF the antenna tuner.
L Perform this step if the antenna tuner is
connected and you want to measure the SWR
of the antenna itself.
2. Select the RTTY or RTTY-R mode.
3. Set the desired frequency band and a frequency
in the portion of the band that you use the most.
4. If necessary, adjust the RF power to more than
30 W in the Multi-function menu.
• 70 MHz: 20 W
( 70 MHz band transmission may be possible,
depending on the transceiver version.)
5. Touch the TX meter several times until the SWR
meter is selected. (p. 3-11)
LightHeavy
Friction adjustor
NOTE: Before transmitting, monitor the operating
frequency to make sure you will not cause
interference to other stations on the same
frequency.
6. Push
TRANSMIT
or hold down [PTT] on the
microphone to transmit.
7. Read the SWR on the meter.
L If the SWR meter indicates 1.5 or less, the
antenna is matched.
8. Push
TRANSMIT
or release [PTT] to stop transmitting.
L If the measured SWR is more than 1.5:1,
push [TUNER] to match the antenna with the
transceiver.
SWR meter
The best match is within this range.
(1.5 or less)
13
OTHER FUNCTIONS
13-3
Measuring SWR (Continue)
D Plot measurement
You can measure the SWR over the entire set
frequency range.
1. Set the desired frequency band.
2. Select the RTTY or RTTY-R mode.
3. If necessary, adjust the RF power to
approximately 30 W in the Multi-function menu.
• 70 MHz: 20 W
( 70 MHz band transmission may be possible,
depending on the transceiver version.)
NOTE: Before transmitting, monitor the operating
frequency to make sure you will not cause
interference to other stations on the same
frequency.
4. Open the SWR GRAPH screen.
MENU
» SWR
5. Set the center frequency for the SWR to be
measured. (Example: 14.080.00)
6. If necessary, touch [STEP] several times until
the measuring step is selected, or touch [BAR]
several times until the number of graph bars is
selected.
L You can select between 10, 50, 100, and
500 kHz measuring steps.
L You can select between 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 and
13 graph bars.
7. Touch
to start measuring.
• Thefrequencymarker“▲”andthemeasurement
frequency are displayed.
Measuring step
Number of
graph bars
Center frequency
8. Push
TRANSMIT
or hold down [PTT] on the
microphone to transmit.
• The bar graph displays the SWR.
Frequency marker
Measurement
frequency
Measuring SWR
The best match
is within this
range.
(1.5 or less)
9. Push
TRANSMIT
or release [PTT] to stop transmitting.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to measure the SWR over
the entire frequency range.
Selecting the display type and font
You can select between 2 display backgrounds and
2 frequency readout fonts.
D Selecting the display background
1. Selectthe“DisplayType”screen.
MENU
» SET > Display > Display Type
2. Select the desired background between A and B
by rotating and then pushing
MULTI
.
• A: Black background (default)
• B: Blue background
3. To close the DISPLAY screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
D Selecting the display font
1. Selectthe“DisplayFont”screen.
MENU
» SET > Display > Display Font
2. Setthedesireddisplayfontto“Basic”or“Round”
by rotating, and then pushing
MULTI
.
• Basic (Default):
• Round:
3. To close the DISPLAY screen, push
EXIT
several
times.
13
OTHER FUNCTIONS
13-4
Protection function
The transceiver has a 2 step protection function to
protectthenalpowerampliersincasetheantenna
SWR becomes high.
Thefunctiondetectsthepowerampliertemperature
and activates when the temperature becomes too
high.
Power down transmission
Reduces the transmission output power.
• “LMT”isdisplayedbelow while transmitting.
TX inhibit
Disables the transmitter.
•
TX
is displayed instead of while the transmitter is
disabled.
When the function is activated, wait until the power
ampliercoolsdownbyusingthetransceivertoonly
receive.
NOTE: Do not turn OFF the transceiver power when
the Protection function is activated. If you do, the
cooling fan will deactivate and it will take longer to
cool down.
• You can check the power
ampliertemperaturewith
the TEMP gauge in the Multi-
function meter.
TX inhibit zone
You can perform a rough frequency calibration by
receiving the radio station WWV, WWVH, or other
frequency signals.
REF adjustment
NOTE:
• The transceiver has been adjusted and tested
at the factory before being shipped out. You
should not have to re-calibrate.
• Before performing a frequency calibration, you
havetoset“CalibrationMarker”toON.
• Spurious signal waveforms may be displayed
while the Calibration Marker is ON.
L Before performing a frequency calibration, set the
following items as described in the table below.
AF RF/SQL
Decent audibility
AF RF/SQL
Maximum RF gain
TWIN PBT
CLR
Reset by holding down for 1 second.
Operating mode
USB
RIT
OFF (No RIT icon displayed)
1. Set the frequency to the standard frequency
station minus 1 kHz.
L If receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as
your standard frequency, set the operating frequency
to 14.99900 MHz.
2. Set“CalibrationMarker”toON.
MENU
» SET > Function > Calibration Marker
3. Selectthe“REFAdjust”item.
MENU
» SET > Function > REF Adjust
4. Rotate
MULTI
to adjust for a zero beat with the
received standard signal.
L“Zerobeat”meansthattheexactsamefrequencies
are set to 2 signals, resulting in a single tone being
transmitted.
5. Set“CalibrationMarker”toOFF.
6. Push
EXIT
several times until the SET screen is
closed.
13
OTHER FUNCTIONS
13-5
You can capture the transceiver display onto an SD
card. Most of the screens used in this manual are
captured using this function. However, some displays
cannot be captured.
D Capturing a screen
1. Openthe“ScreenCapture[POWER]SW”screen.
MENU
» SET > Function >
Screen Capture [POWER] SW
2. Select“ON”byrotatingandpushing
MULTI
.
3. Select the desired screen to capture.
4. Push
POWER
to capture the screen.
• The captured screen is saved onto the SD card.
D Viewing the captured screen
1. Open the SCREEN CAPTURE VIEW screen.
MENU
» SET > SD Card > Screen Capture View
• The capture list is displayed.
• The latest screen capture is at the top of the list.
2. Select the desired screen capture to be displayed
by rotating and pushing
MULTI
.
• The selected screen capture is displayed.
L While a screen capture is displayed, you can
scroll through all the screen captures by rotating
MULTI
.
Other options in the capture list
1. While the capture list is displayed, push
QUICK
to
display the QUICK MENU.
2. Select the desired option.
• File Information: Displays the name, size, and date of
the selected screen capture.
• Delete: Theconrmationdialogisdisplayedbefore
deletingthele.Select[YES]todeleteorselect[NO]
to cancel.
• Delete All: Theconrmationdialogisdisplayedbefore
deletingallthelesonthelist.Select[YES]todelete
or select [NO] to cancel.
Screen Capture function
You can display your own call sign at power ON.
[Example: Displaying the call sign JA3YUA]
1. Open the MY CALL screen.
MENU
» SET > Display > My Call
2. Enter your call sign of up to 10 characters.
LSee“Keyboardenteringandediting”(p.1-8)for
details.
3. Touch [ENT] to save the entered call sign.
Displaying my call sign
• The MY CALL screen closes and returns to the
DISPLAY screen.
• The entered name is displayed.
• The entered call sign is displayed at power ON.
14-1
MAINTENANCESection 14
Cleaning ............................................................................... 14-2
Replacing fuse ...................................................................... 14-2
D DC power cable fuses ................................................... 14-2
D Circuitry fuse ................................................................. 14-2
Touch screen calibration function ......................................... 14-3
Resetting .............................................................................. 14-4
D Partial reset ................................................................... 14-4
D All reset ......................................................................... 14-4
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 14-5
14-2
MAINTENANCE
14
Cleaning
DO NOT use harsh solvents such as
benzine or alcohol when cleaning,
because they will damage the transceiver
surfaces.
If the transceiver becomes dusty or dirty,
wipe it clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Replacing fuse
If a fuse blows, or the transceiver stops functioning,
nd and repair the cause of the problem. Then replace
the damaged fuse with a new, adequately rated fuse.
The fuses are installed in the DC power cable and the
circuitry in the body, to protect the transceiver.
• DC power cable fuses .......................ATC 25 A /30 A*
• Circuitry fuse ................................................. ATC 5 A
* The fuse type differs, depending on the transceiver version.
RWARNING!
• Disconnect the DC power cable from the transceiver
before replacing the fuse.
• NEVER use fuses that are not specied.
CAUTION: When you remove a fuse, use longnose pliers
to protect your ngers and the fuse holders.
D DC power cable fuses
See the following illustration to replace the DC power
cable fuses.
ATC 25 A/30 A fuse
D Circuitry fuse
1. Remove the 14 screws, then remove the cover.
2. Replace the circuitry fuse as shown below.
3. Replace the cover and the screws.
ATC 5 A fuse
14-3
MAINTENANCE
14
Touch screen calibration function
When no screen action occurs, or a different function
is activated after touching the screen, the touched
point and the detected range may be different.
In that case, the Touch screen calibration function
helps to correct the touch screen sensing
performance.
1. Open the OTHERS screen.
MENU
» SET > Others
2. Touch “Touch Screen Calibration.”
• A dot is displayed on the screen.
3. Touch the dot on the screen.
• A new dot is displayed in another position.
4. Repeat step 2.
L When the calibration is completed, the transceiver
returns to the OTHERS screen.
dot
14-4
MAINTENANCE
14
Resetting
Occasionally, erroneous information may be
displayed. This may be caused by static electricity or
by other factors.
If this problem occurs, turn OFF the transceiver. After
waiting a few seconds, turn ON the transceiver.
If the problem still exists, perform a Partial reset as
described to the right.
If the problem still exists after a Partial reset, perform
an All reset as described to the right.
NOTE: An All reset clears all data and returns all settings
to their factory defaults. Save memory channel content,
setting status, and so on, onto an SD card before the All
reset. (p. 8-4)
After performing the partial reset
A Partial reset resets operating settings to their default
values (VFO frequency, VFO settings, menu contents)
without clearing the items listed below:
• Memory channel contents (Section 9)
• MY Call (p. 13-5)
• Memory Keyer (p. 4-19)
• RTTY memory (p. 4-24)
• User Band Edge (p. 3-7)
• REF Adjust (p. 13-4)
• Fixed Edges (p. 5-7)
After performing the All reset
All reset clears all data and returns all settings to their
factory defaults.
Memory channel contents, lter setting and so on
will all be cleared, so you will need to rewrite your
operating settings, unless you have a backup.
When you cannot enter the Set mode
If a touch screen operation error or an unexpected
operation occurs, you cannot enter the Set mode. In
that case, perform the All reset as described below:
While holding down
CLEAR
and
V/M
, push
.
D Partial reset
1. Open the RESET screen.
MENU
» SET > Others > Reset
2. Touch “Partial reset.”
• The conrmation screen is displayed.
3. Touch [ Yes].
L After the resetting, the default VFO mode screen is
displayed.
D All reset
1. Open the RESET screen.
MENU
» SET > Others > Reset
2. Touch “All reset.”
• The conrmation screen is displayed.
3. Touch [NEXT].
4. After carefully reading the displayed message,
touch [YES] to perform the All reset.
L After the resetting, the default VFO mode screen is
displayed.
14-5
MAINTENANCE
14
Troubleshooting
The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem, or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your nearest
Icom Dealer or Service Center.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Power does not come
on when
is
pushed.
Power cable is improperly
connected.
Reconnect the DC power cable
correctly.
p. 2-4
The external power supply is turned
OFF.
Turn ON the external power supply. p. 2-4
The DC power cable fuses or
circuitry fuse are blown.
Find and repair the cause of the
problem and then replace the
damaged fuse with a new one.
p. 14-2
No sound is heard from
the speaker.
Audio level is too low.
Rotate
AF RF/SQL
(inner) clockwise
to obtain a suitable listening level.
p. 3-2
The squlech is closed.
Rotate
AF RF/SQL
(outer) to the 12
o’clock position to open the squelch.
p. 3-10
The tone squelch is ON in the FM
mode.
Turn OFF the Tone squlech. p. 4-30
An external speaker or headphones
are connected to [PHONES] jack.
Disconnect the head-phone or
external speaker.
p. 2-2
The external speaker cable is cut. Check the external speaker cable
and repair it.
–
Sensitivity is too low,
and only strong signals
can be heard.
The attenuator is activated. Turn OFF the attenuator in the
FUNCTION screen.
p. 4-3
The squlech is closed.
Rotate
AF RF/SQL
(outer) to 12
o’clock position to open the squelch.
p. 3-10
The antenna is defective or the
coaxial cable connector is shorted
or cut.
Repair the problem and then
reconnect to the antenna connector.
p. 2-3
You are using an antenna not
suitable for the band you have
selected.
Connect an antenna suitable for the
operating frequency.
p. 2-3
Hold down
TUNER
to tune the
antenna.
p. 11-2
No power output or the
output power is too low.
The operating frequency is outside a
ham band.
Set the frequency to a ham band. p. 3-4
The modulation input signal level is
set too low.
Adjust the microphone gain in the
Multi-function menu.
p. 3-11
The microphone is bad, or the [MIC]
connector is shorted.
Try to transmit in the FM, CW, or
RTTY mode to check whether the
microphone or the transceiver has a
problem.
p. 3-3
The antenna SWR is more than 3:1. Adjust the antenna for an SWR of
less than 3:1.
p. 11-2
The antenna is not properly tuned.
Hold down
TUNER
for 1 second to
tune the antenna.
p. 11-2
TX power is set too low. Adjust the RF POWER in the Multi-
function menu.
p. 3-11
14-6
MAINTENANCE
14
Troubleshooting (Continued)
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
The transceiver
automatically switches
to transmit while
receiving.
The VOX function is ON.
Push
VOX/BK-IN
to turn OFF the VOX
function
p. 4-10
The VOX gain is set too high. Adjust the VOX gain. p. 4-10
Cannot contact with
another station even
if receiving and
transmitting seem
successful.
The Split function is activated.
( The transmit and receive
frequencies are different.)
Push
SPLIT
to turn OFF the function.
p. 4-13
The RIT function or the ∂TX function
is ON and a different receive or
transmit frequency is set.
Push
RIT
or
TX
to turn OFF the
function.
p. 4-3
p. 4-11
Received audio in the
SSB mode is unclear or
distorted.
The incorrect sideband is selected. Toggle between USB and LSB. p. 3-3
The PBT function is activated.
Hold down
TWIN PBT
CLR
to clear the
settings.
p. 4-5
Transmit signal is
unclear or distorted in
the SSB mode.
The transceiver MIC gain is too high. Adjust the MIC gain level so that the
meter reading swings between 30
and 50% of the ALC scale.
p. 3-11
The MIC gain of the desktop
microphone is too high.
The displayed
frequency does not
properly change by
rotating
MAIN DIAL
.
The Dial Lock function is activated.
Hold down
SPEECH
to turn the Dial Lock
function OFF.
p. 3-10
Programmed scan does
not start.
The same frequencies have been
set in scan edge memory channels
P1 and P2.
Set different frequencies in scan
edge memory channels P1 and P2.
p. 10-3
Memory scan does not
start.
0 or only 1 memory channel is set. Set at least 2 memory channels. p. 9-3
Select memory scan
does not start.
0 or only 1 memory channel is
designated as a Select channel.
Designate at least 2 memory
channels as Select channels for the
scan.
–
The contents of a
selected memory
channel is not changed.
The contents of the selected memory
channel were changed, but they are
not saved.
When you want to save the changed
settings, touch [MW] for 1 second to
write them into the memory channel
in the VFO/MEMORY screen.
p. 9-3
Cannot hear the speech
after pushing
SPEECH
.
The speech level is too low. Adjust the speech level in the
Speech setting.
p. 12-6
The antenna SWR is
too high.
The antenna is not properly tuned. Adjust the antenna SWR.
The antenna SWR should be less
than 3.
p. 13-2
The coaxial cable is not suitable. Use a coaxial cable whose
characteristic impedance is 50 Ω.
p. 17-2
“OVF” is displayed. Excessively strong signal is
received.
Rotate
AF RF/SQL
(outer) counter
clockwise.
p. 3-10
Turn ON the attenuator. p. 4-3
15-1
UPDATING THE FIRMWARESection 15
General ................................................................................. 15-2
D About the rmware updating ......................................... 15-2
D Checking the rmware version ..................................... 15-2
D Preparation ................................................................... 15-3
D Unzipping the rmware le ........................................... 15-4
Updating the rmware .......................................................... 15-5
15-2
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
15
General
D About updating the fi rmware
You can update the IC-7300’s  rmware using an SD
card. Updating the  rmware adds new functions and
improves performance parameters.
You can download the latest  rmware from the Icom
website.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html
D Checking the fi rmware version
You can check the  rmware version in the Set mode.
1. Open the INFORMATION screen.
MENU
» SET > Others > Information
2. Touch “Version.”
• The  rmware version is displayed.
The VERSION screen
TIP: You also can check the  rmware version in the
Opening screen when you turn ON the transceiver.
Rotate
Push
The  rmware version is displayed.
15-3
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
15
D Preparation
Access the following URL and download the firmware
file.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html
L These instructions are based on Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7.
1. Click [Support].
2. Click the “Firmware Updates/Software
Downloads” link.
3. Click the desired firmware file link in the IC-7300
group.
4. Read “Regarding this Download Service”
carefully, and then click [Agree].
General (Continued)
Click
Click
Click
15-4
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
15
General (Continued)
5. C l i c k “Save as” in the displayed File Download
dialog.
6. Select the location where you want to save the
firmware, and then click [Save] in the displayed
File Download dialog.
• The  le starts downloading.
• The  rmware and the  rm utility are compressed in a
“zip” format folder. Unzip it before use.
D Unzipping the fi rmware folder
1. Right-click the downloaded firmware folder (zip
format).
• Right-click menu is displayed.
2. Click “Extract All...”
• After unzipping, a folder is created in the same
location as the downloaded folder.
L In the “7300_*” folder, “7300_*.dat” is created.
* represents the release number.
Click
Click
Click
15-5
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
15
Updating the fi rmware
IMPORTANT: To update the  rmware,  rst format
your SD card using the IC-7300. (p. 8-3) Then copy
the downloaded  rmware data from your PC to the
SD card. (p. 8-4)
CAUTION:
NEVER turn OFF the transceiver while
updating the  rmware.
If you turn OFF the transceiver, or if a power failure
occurs while updating, the transceiver  rmware will be
damaged and you will have to send the transceiver
back to the nearest Icom distributor for repair.
This type of repair is out of warranty, even if the
transceiver warranty period is still valid.
TIP: BE SURE to unzip the downloaded  le. See
“Unzipping the  rmware  le (p. 15-4)” for details.
1. Copy the downloaded firmware data into the
IC-7300 folder on an SD card or a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the SD card into the transceiver's
[SD CARD] slot.
3. On the Set mode menu screen, display the
SD CARD screen.
MENU
» SET > SD card
4. Select “Firmware Update.”
• The  rmware update agreement screen is displayed.
5. Touch [Ù] or [Ú] to scroll the screen.
L Carefully read all the displayed precautions.
6. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
touch [YES].
• The  le select screen is displayed.
L When you want to cancel the updating, touch [NO].
7. Touch the Firmware (Example: 7300_101).
• The  nal con rmation screen is displayed.
L Carefully read all the displayed precations.
8. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
touch [YES] for 1 second.
• The updating starts.
L If you want to cancel the updating, touch [NO].
Rotate
Push
Copy
The Firmware Update Agreement screen
15-6
15
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
Updating the rmware (Continued)
The screen changes as shown below during the
updating.
L The IC-7300 reads the rmware le from the SD card
and writes it to the main CPU and DSP/FPGA.
L Downloading and loading status are displayed in the
dialogs.
9. “Firmware updating has completed.” is displayed
in the dialog.
• The IC-7300 will automatically restart.
L After the updating nishes, the operating screen is
displayed.
TIP: To check the rmware version after the updating,
see “Checking the rmware version (p. 15-2)” for
details.
16-1
Section 16 SPECIFICATIONS
D General ......................................................................... 16-2
D Transmitter .................................................................... 16-2
D Receiver ........................................................................ 16-3
D Antenna tuner ............................................................... 16-3
16
SPECIFICATIONS
16-2
D General
• Frequency coverage (unit: MHz):
Receiver 0.030000 ~ 74.800000*
1
Transmitter 1.800000 ~ 01.999999*
2
3.500000 ~ 03.999999*
2
5.255000 ~ 05.405000*
2
7.000000 ~ 07.300000*
2
10.100000 ~ 10.150000*
2
14.000000 ~ 14.350000*
2
18.068000 ~ 18.168000*
2
21.000000 ~ 21.450000*
2
24.890000 ~ 24.990000*
2
28.000000 ~ 29.700000*
2
50.000000 ~ 54.000000*
2
70.000000 ~ 70.500000*
2
*
1
Some frequency ranges are not guaranteed.
*
2
Depending on the transceiver version.
• Operating modes: USB/LSB (J3E), CW (A1A), RTTY (F1B), AM (A3E) and FM (F3E)
• Number of memory channels: 101 (including 2 scan edges)
• Antenna impedance: 50 Ω
• Power supply requirement: 13.8 V DC (±15%)
• Operating temperature range: –10°C to +60°C, +14°F to +140°F
• Frequency stability: Less than ±0.5 ppm (–10°C to +60°C, +14°F to +140°F)
• Frequency resolution: 1 Hz (minimum)
• Power consumption:
Receive Standby 0.9 A
Maximum audio 1.25 A
Transmit Maximum power 21.0 A
• Dimensions (projections not included): 240 (W)×94 (H)×238 (D) mm, 9.4 (W)×3.7 (H)×9.4 (D) in
• Weight (approximately): 4.2 kg, 9.3 Ib
D Transmitter
• Transmit output power:
HF and 50 MHz bands
SSB/CW/RTTY/FM 2~100 W
AM 1~25 W
70 MHz band*
2
SSB/CW/RTTY/FM 2~50 W
AM 1~12.5 W
*
2
Depending on the transceiver version.
• Modulation system:
SSB P.S.N. modulation
AM Low power modulation
FM Reactance modulation
• Spurious emission:
Harmonics Less than –50 dB (1.8~28 MHz)
Less than –63 dB (50 MHz band)
Less than –60 dB (70 MHz band)
Out-of-band emission Less than –40 dB (1.8~28 MHz)
Less than –60 dB (50 MHz band)
Less than –60 dB (70 MHz band)
• Carrier suppression: More than 50 dB
• Unwanted sideband suppression: More than 50 dB
• Microphone impedance: 600 Ω
16
SPECIFICATIONS
16-3
D Receiver
• Receive system: Direct sampling superheterodyne
• Intermediate frequency: 36 kHz
• Sensitivity (Filter: SOFT):
SSB/CW (BW=2.4 kHz, 10 dB S/N)
1.8 ~ 29.999999 MHz Less than –123 dBm (0.16 μV) (P.AMP1 ON)
50 MHz band Less than –125 dBm (0.13 μV) (P.AMP2 ON)
70 MHz band*
2
Less than –123 dBm (0.16 μV) (P.AMP2 ON)
*
2
Depending on the transceiver version.
AM (BW=6 kHz, 10 dB S/N)
0.5 ~ 1.8 MHz Less than –85 dBm (12.6 μV) (P.AMP1 ON)
1.8 ~ 29.999999 MHz Less than –101 dBm (2.0 μV) (P.AMP1 ON)
50 MHz and 70 MHz bands Less than –107 dBm (1.0 μV) (P.AMP2 ON)
FM (BW=15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)
28.0 ~ 29.7 MHz Less than –113 dBm (0.5 μV) (P.AMP1 ON)
50 MHz and 70 MHz bands Less than –119 dBm (0.25 μV) (P.AMP2 ON)
• Squelch sensitivity (threshold):
SSB Less than –92 dBm (5.6 μV)
FM Less than –117 dBm (0.3 μV)
(HF band: P.AMP1 ON, 50 MHz band: P.AMP2 ON)
• Selectivity (Filter: SHARP):
SSB (BW=2.4 kHz) More than 2.4 kHz/–6 dB
Less than 3.4 kHz/–40 dB
CW (BW=500 Hz) More than 500 Hz/–6 dB
Less than 700 Hz/–40 dB
RTTY (BW=500 Hz) More than 500 Hz/–6 dB
Less than 800 Hz/–40 dB
AM (BW=6 kHz) More than 6.0 kHz/–6 dB
Less than 10 kHz/–40 dB
FM (BW=15 kHz) More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB
Less than 22 kHz/–40 dB
• Spurious and image rejection: More than 70 dB (except for ADC aliasing)
• Audio output power: More than 2.5 W (8 Ω load, 1 kHz, 10% distortion)
• AF output impedance: 8 Ω
• RIT variable range: ±9.999 kHz
D Antenna tuner
• Tunable impedance range: 16.7~150 Ω (unbalanced) (less than 3:1 VSWR)
• Tuning accuracy: Less than 1.5:1 VSWR
• Tuning time (approximately): 2~3 seconds (average)
15 seconds (maximum)
LAll stated specications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation.
17-1
OPTIONSSection 17
Options ................................................................................. 17-2
Mounting the MB-118 ........................................................... 17-3
Attaching the MB-123 ........................................................... 17-3
17-2
17
OPTIONS
Options
IC-PW1/IC-PW1EURO linear amplifier
HF/50 MHz all band 1 kW linear amplier including an
automatic antenna tuner. An optional OPC-599 is required
for the connection.
SM-50
desktop microphone
Dynamic microphone with
[UP]/[DOWN] switches.
HM-36 microphone
Hand microphone with
[UP]/[DOWN] switches.
SM-30
desktop microphone
Desktop microphone
with a low frequency cut
function.
PS-126
dc power supply
• Output voltage: 13.8 V DC
• Maximum output current:
25 A
SP-23
external speaker
External speaker with high
and low frequency cut
functions.
CT-17 ci-v converter
For remote transceiver
control using a PC
equipped with an
RS-232C port.
SP-34
external speaker
External speaker with high
and low frequency cut
functions.
AH-2b
antenna element
A 2.5 m (8.2 ft)
long antenna
element for mobile
operation with the
AH-4.
AH-4 antenna tuner
Automatic antenna
tuner to tune a long
wire antenna for base,
portable, or mobile
HF/50 MHz operation.
Approved Icom optional equipment is designed
for optimal performance when used with an Icom
transceiver. Icom is not responsible for the destruction
or damage to an Icom transceiver in the event the
Icom transceiver is used with equipment that is not
manufactured or approved by Icom.
AH-740
automatic
tuning antenna
High performance,
automatic high-speed
tuning antenna.
The optional AH-5NV
nvis kit is available.
• AH-5NV nvis kit
Use with the AH-740.
• AH-710 folded dipole antenna
Covers 2 to 30 MHz wide frequency range.
Element length: 24.5 m (80.4 ft)
Coaxial cable (supplied): 30 m (98.4 ft)
• HM-219 microphone
The same as supplied.
• MB-118 mounting bracket
To mount the transceiver inside a vehicle.
• MB-123 carrying handle
• OPC-420 control cable
A 10 m (32.8 ft) shielded control cable for the AH-4.
• OPC-599 adapter cable
13-pin ACC connector adaptor to 7-pin + 8-pin ACC
connectors.
• RS-BA1 ip remote control software
NOTE: To remotely control transceivers using the
RS-BA1, BE SURE to comply with your local regulations.
• SP-33 external speaker
Designed for base station operation.
• SP-35 external speaker
Designed for mobile operation.
17-3
17
OPTIONS
Mounting the MB-118
Adjust for the best
viewing angle.
Screw
MB-118 Drill 4 holes of 3 mm (0.12 in) to attach the bracket.
L Drill 5.5 mm~5.6 mm (0.21 in~0.22 in) holes when using
the supplied hex screws.
Flat washer
Spring washer
Bolt
Mount the MB-118
mounting bracket to a place
where it can be rmly attached.
L We recommend that you periodically check
whether the screws are loose or not, especially
after a long period of use.
NOTE:
• Before mounting the MB-118, carefully read
PRECAUTIONS (p. vi) and decide the mounting place.
• DO NOT use bolts other than the ones that are supplied
with the MB-118. Other bolts (longer than 8 mm/0.31 in)
may damage the internal units.
Attaching the MB-123
NOTE: DO NOT use other than the screws supplied with
the MB-123.
Rubber
feet
Push-in the
center part
Rubber
feet
Carrying handle
The optional MB-123 carrying handle with the
rubber feet is convenient for carrying the transceiver.
1. Attach the rubber feet supplied with the MB-123 to
the transceiver.
L To rmly attach, push-in the center part of the rubber
feet.
2. Attach the carrying handle using the supplied
screws as shown to the right.
18-1
Section 18
CONNECTOR INFORMATION
ACC socket........................................................................... 18-2
D OPC-599 ACC conversion cable pin assignments ....... 18-3
Microphone connector .......................................................... 18-3
D External keypad ............................................................ 18-3
KEY jack ............................................................................... 18-4
EXT-SP jack ......................................................................... 18-4
REMOTE jack ....................................................................... 18-4
ALC jack ............................................................................... 18-4
SEND jack ............................................................................ 18-4
PHONES jack ....................................................................... 18-4
DC power socket .................................................................. 18-4
18
CONNECTOR INFORMATION
18-2
ACC socket
Connects to external equipment or a PC to control the
external unit or to control the transceiver.
• ACC socket
ACC
PIN
No.
NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
1 8 V
Regulated 8 V output.
( Used as the reference voltage for the
band voltage.)
Output voltage:
Output current:
8 V ±0.3 V
Less than 10 mA
2 GND Connects to ground. —
3 SEND*
1
Input/output
pin.
An external unit
controls the transceiver.
When this pin goes to
ground, the transceiver
transmits.
Input voltage (RX):
Input voltage (TX):
Current ow:
2.0 to 20.0 V
–0.5 to +0.8 V
Maximum 20 mA
The pin goes low
when the transceiver
transmits.
Output voltage (TX):
Current ow:
Less than 0.1 V
Maximum 200 mA
4 BDT Not used. —
5 BAND
Band voltage output.
( Varies with the selected amateur
band)
Output voltage: 0 to 8.0 V
6 ALC ALC voltage input.
Input level:
Input impedance:
–4 to 0 V
More than 3.3 kΩ
7 NC — —
8 13.8 V 13.8 V output when power is ON. Output current: Maximum 1 A
9 TKEY Not used. —
10 FSKK Controls RTTY keying.
High level:
Low level:
Output current:
More than 2.4 V
Less than 0.6 V
Less than 2 mA
11 MOD Modulator input.
Input impedance:
Input level:
10 kΩ
100 mV rms
*
3
12
AF/IF
(IF=12 kHz)*
2
Fixed AF detector or receive IF
(12 kHz) signal output.
Output impedance:
Output level:
4.7 kΩ
100 ~ 300 mV rms
*
4
13 SQL S
Squelch output.
Grounded when the squelch opens.
SQL open:
SQL closed:
Less than 0.3 V/5 mA
More than 6.0 V/100 μA
1 2 3 4
8765
9
10 11 12
13
13-pin
Rear panel view
q brown
w red
e orange
r yellow
t green
y blue
u purple
i gray
o white
!0 black
!1 pink
!2 light
blue
!3 light
green
Color refers to the
cable strands of the
supplied cable.
*
2
You can change the pin 12 setting in the “ACC/USB
Output Select” item on the CONNECTORS set screen.
If the pin is set to IF, the transceiver outputs a 12 kHz IF
signal from [ACC]. In that case, you can listen to the DRM
broadcast with the application software receiver that is
installed into your PC.
*
3
You can change the input level in the “ACC MOD Level”
item on the CONNECTORS set screen. (p.12-7)
100 mV rms is at the 50% (default) setting.
*
4
You can change the output level in the “ACC/USB AF
Output Level” item on the CONNECTORS set screen.
(p. 12-7)
Approximately 200 mV rms is at the 50% (default) setting.
*
1
When the SEND terminal controls an inductive load, such
as a relay, a counter-electromotive force can malfunction
or damage the transceiver. To prevent this, we recommend
adding a switching diode, such as an 1SS133, on the load
side of the circuit to absorb the counter-electromotive force.
When the diode is added, a delay in relay switching may
occur. Be sure to check its switching action before operating.
(Example) ACC socket
To a non-Icom
linear amplier
Relay
Switching diode
e SEND
i 13.8 V
18
CONNECTOR INFORMATION
18-3
ACC socket (Continued)
Microphone connector
D OPC-599 ACC conversion cable pin assignments
1 2 3 4
8
8
765
9
10 11 12
13
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
[ACC] socket
(IC-7300)
ACC 1 ACC 2
q FSKK
w GND
e SEND
r MOD
t AF
y SQLS
u 13.8 V
i ALC
q 8 V
w GND
e SEND
r BAND
t ALC
y —
u 13.8 V
q Microphone input
w +8 V DC output
e Frequency up/down
r Squelch line output
t PTT
y GND (PTT ground)
u GND
(Microphone ground)
i AF output
PIN No. DESCRIPTION
q
Microphone input (Impedance: 600 Ω)
w
+8 V DC output (Maximum 10 mA)
e
Up: Ground
Down: Ground through 470 Ω
r
Grounded when the squelch opens.
t
PTT
y
PTT ground
u
Microphone ground
i
AF output (varies with the [AF] control.)
D External keypad
A circuit is used to output memory content from 4
memories. You can output desired memory content
such as that from a CW Memory keyer (M1 ~ M4),
Voice memory (T1 ~ T4), RTTY Memory (RT1 ~ RT4)
to be transmitted.
z Push a switch to send the memory information.
z Hold down the switch for 1 second to repeatedly
send the memory information.
L To use the external keypad, turn ON the following
items in the CONNECTORS set screen. (p. 12-8)
MENU
» SET > Connectors > External Keypad
• VOICE: ON
• KEYER: ON
• RTTY: ON
L The External keypad is not supplied by Icom. (User
supplied)
The OPC-599 ACC conversion cable connects
between a 13 pin [ACC] socket and 7 pin and 8 pin
sockets.
PINe
PINy
1.5 kø
±
5%
1.5 kø
±
5%
2.2 kø
±
5%
4.7 kø
±
5%
S1S2S3S4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MIC
External keypad
Front panel
view
[MIC]
connector
Front panel view
18
CONNECTOR INFORMATION
18-4
KEY jack
EXT-SP jack
REMOTE jack
ALC jack
SEND jack
PHONES jack
Connects to a CW straight key or a paddle:
6.35 mm (¼ in) (d)
When connecting a CW straight key.
com
dash
dot
When connecting a CW paddle and using the internal
electronic keyer.
Connects to an external speaker:
3.5 mm (⅛ in) (d)
• Output impedance: 4 ~ 8 Ω
• Output level: More than 2.5 W at
10% distortion into an
8 Ω load.
EXT-SP
Used for computer control and transceive
operation:
3.5 mm (⅛ in) (d)
The optional CT-17 is required when
connecting a PC to [REMOTE].
REMOTE
ct-17
9–15 V DC
PC
mini-plug cable
Cable
( RS-232C
type)
IC-7300
ALC
Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-
Icom linear amplier. (RCA Plug)
• Control voltage: –4 ~ 0 V
SEND
The terminal goes low when the transceiver
transmits. (RCA Plug)
This terminal is used to control an external
non-Icom linear amplier.
T/R control voltage and current must be
less than 16 V DC and 0.5 A.
Connects to standard stereo headphones:
3.5 mm (⅛ in) (d)
• Output impedance: 8 ~ 16 Ω
• Output level: More than 5 mW into
an 8 Ω load.
PHONES
DC power socket
Accepts the regulated DC power
for 13.8 V DC ±15% through the
supplied DC power cable.
RWARNING! NEVER reverse the
DC power cable polarity.
Rear panel view
19-1
Section 19 CONTROL COMMAND
Remote control (CI-V) information ........................................ 19-2
D CI-V connection ............................................................ 19-2
D Preparing ...................................................................... 19-2
D Data format ................................................................... 19-2
D Command table ............................................................ 19-3
D Data content description ............................................... 19-8
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-2
Remote control (CI-V) information
D CI-V connection
The transceiver's operating frequency, mode, VFO
and memory selection, can be remotely controlled
using a PC.
Choose your connection method from the following:
• A USB cable (A-B type, user supplied)
The required USB driver and driver installation guide
can be downloaded from the Icom web site.
Go to “http://www.icom.co.jp/world,” and then click
“Support,” “Firmware Updates / Software downloads”
in sequence.
L The download procedure on the web page may be
changed without notice.
• The optional CT-17 CI-V level converter.
Connects to a PC with an RS-232C port.
D Preparing
The Icom Communications Interface V (CI-V) is used
for remote control.
To control the transceiver, rst set its address, data
communication speed, and transceive function. These
settings are set in Set mode.
D Data format
The CI-V system can be written using the following
data formats. Data formats differ according to
command numbers. A data area or sub command is
added for some commands.
ct-17
IC-7300
• Connection example (using CT-17)
PC
9~15 V DC
mini-plug cable
Controller to IC-7300
IC-7300 to controller
FE FE 94 E0 Cn Sc Data area FD
Preamble
code (fixed)
Transceiver’s
default address
Controller’s
default address
Command number
(see the command table)
Sub command number
(see command table)
BCD code data for
frequency or memory
number entry
End of message
code (fixed)
FE FE E0 94 FB FD
FE FE E0 94 FA FD
Preamble
code (fixed)
Controller’s
default address
Transceiver’s
default address
OK code
(fixed)
End of message
code (fixed)
NG code
(fixed)
q w e r t y u
FE FE E0 94 Cn Sc Data area FD
q w e r t y u
OK message to controller
NG message to controller
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-3
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
00 p. 19-8 Send frequency data (transceive)
01 p. 19-8 Send mode data (transceive)
02 p. 19-8 Read band edge frequencies
03 p. 19-8 Read operating frequency
04 p. 19-8 Read operating mode
05 p. 19-8 Set operating frequency
06 p. 19-8 Operating mode selection for transceive
07 Select the VFO mode
00 Select VFO A
01 Select VFO B
A0 Equalize VFO A and VFO B
B0 Exchange VFO A and VFO B
08 Select the Memory mode
0001 to
0109
Select the Memory channel
*(0001=M-CH01, 0099=M-CH99)
0100 Select program scan edge channel P1
0101 Select program scan edge channel P2
09 Memory write
0A Memory copy to VFO
0B Memory clear
0E 00 Scan stop
01 Programmed/memory scan start
02 Programmed scan start
03 F scan start
12 Fine programmed scan start
13
Fine ∂F scan start
22 Memory scan start
23 Select memory scan start
A1
Select ∂F scan span ±5 kHz
A2
Select ∂F scan span ±10 kHz
A3
Select ∂F scan span ±20 kHz
A4
Select ∂F scan span ±50 kHz
A5
Select ∂F scan span ±100 kHz
A6
Select ∂F scan span ±500 kHz
A7
Select ∂F scan span ±1 MHz
B0 Set as non-select channel
B1 Set as select channel
( The previously set number by CI-V is set
after turning power ON, or “1” is selected if
no selection is performed.)
01 to 03 Set as select channel
*(01=SEL1, 02=SEL2, 03=SEL3)
B2 00 to 03 Set for select memory scan
*(00=ALL, 01=SEL1, 02=SEL2, 03=SEL3)
D0 Set Scan resume OFF
D3 Set Scan resume ON
0F 00/01 Read Split setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
00 Turn the split function OFF
01 Turn the split function ON
10* 00 Send/read the tuning step OFF
01 Send/read the 100 Hz tuning step
02 Send/read the 1 kHz tuning step
03 Send/read the 5 kHz tuning step
04 Send/read the 9 kHz tuning step
05 Send/read the 10 kHz tuning step
06 Send/read the 12.5 kHz tuning step
07 Send/read the 20 kHz tuning step
08 Send/read the 25 kHz tuning step
11* 00/20 Send/read Attenuator
*(00=OFF, 20=20dB ON)
13 00 Speech all data with voice synthesizer
01 Speech the operating frequency and S meter
level by voice synthesizer
02 Speech the operating mode by voice
synthesizer
14* 01 0000 to
0255
Send/read the AF level
*(0000=min. to 0255=max.)
02 0000 to
0255
Send/read the RF gain level
*(0000=min. to 0255=max.)
03 0000 to
0255
Send/read the squelch level
*(0000=min. to 0255=max.)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
06 0000 to
0255
Send/read the NR level
*(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
07 0000 to
0255
Send/read inner [TWIN PBT] position
*
( 0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max.
CW)
08 0000 to
0255
Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] position
*( 0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max.
CW)
09 0000 to
0255
Send/read CW pitch
*( 0000=300 Hz, 0128=600 Hz, 0255=900 Hz;
5 Hz steps)
0A 0000 to
0255
Send/read [RF PWR] position
*(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
0B 0000 to
0255
Send/read [MIC] position
*(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
0C 0000 to
0255
Send/read [KEY SPEED] level
*(0000=6wpm, 0255=48wpm)
0D 0000 to
0255
Send/read [NOTCH] position
*
( 0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max.
CW)
0E 0000 to
0255
Send/read the COMP level
*(0000=0 to 0255=10)
0F 0000 to
0255
Send/read the Break-IN Delay setting
*(0000=2.0d to 0255=13.0d)
12 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB level
*(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
15 0000 to
0255
Send/read the Monitor gain
*(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
16 0000 to
0255
Send/read the VOX gain
*(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
17 0000 to
0255
Send/read the Anti VOX gain
*(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
19 0000 to
0255
Send/read BRIGHT level
*(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
15 01 00/01 Read noise or S-meter squelch status
*(squelch close)
02 0000 to
0255
Read S-meter level
*(0000=S0, 0120=S9, 0241=S9+60dB)
05 00/01 Read various squelch function’s status
*(squelch closed)
11 0000 to
0255
Read PO meter level
*(0000=0%, 0143=50%, 213=100%)
12 0000 to
0255
Read SWR meter level
*( 0000=SWR1.0, 0048=SWR1.5,
0080=SWR2.0, 0120=SWR3.0)
13 0000 to
0255
Read ALC meter level
*(0000=Min. to 0120=Max.)
14 0000 to
0255
Read COMP meter level
*(0000=0 dB, 0130=15 dB,0241=30 dB)
15 0000 to
0255
Read Vd meter level
*(0000=0 V, 0013=10 V, 0241=16 V)
16 0000 to
0255
Read Id meter level
*(0000=0, 0097=10, 0146=15, 0241=25)
16* 02 00 to 02 Preamp
( 00=OFF, 01=Preamp 1 ON, 02=Preamp 2 ON)
12 00 to 03
AGC
*(00=OFF, 01= FAST, 02= MID, 03=SLOW)
22 00 to 01 Noise blanker *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
40 00 to 01 Noise reduction *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
41 00 to 01 Auto notch function *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
42 00 to 01 Repeater tone *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
43 00 to 01 Tone squelch *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
44 00 to 01 Speech compressor *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
45 00 to 01 Monitor function *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
46 00 to 01 VOX function *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
47 00 to 02 BK-IN function
*( 00=BK-IN OFF, 01=Semi BK-IN ON,
02=Full BK-IN ON)
48 00 to 01 Manual notch function *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
4F 00 to 01 Twin Peak Filter *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
Can be turned ON only when Mark and Shift
are set to 2125 Hz and 170 Hz, respectively.
D Command table
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-4
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
50 00 to 01 Dial lock function *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
56 00 to 01 DSP lter type *(00=SHARP, 01=SOFT)
57 00 to 02 Manual notch width
(00=WIDE, 01=MID, 02=NAR)
58 00 to 02 SSB transmit bandwidth
(00=WIDE, 01=MID, 02=NAR)
17 p. 19-11 Send CW messages*
2
18 00 Turn OFF the transceiver
01 Turn ON the transceiver*
3
19 00 Read the transceiver ID
1A* 00 p. 19-10 Send/read memory contents
01 p. 19-9 Send/read band stacking register contents
02 p. 19-10 Send/read memory keyer contents*
1
03 00 to 49 Send/read the selected lter width
( AM: 00=200 Hz to 49=10 kHz; other than AM
modes: 00=50 Hz to 31/40=2700 Hz/3600
Hz)
04 00 to 13 Send/read the selected AGC time constant
*( 00=OFF, AM: 01=0.3 sec. to 13=8.0 sec.,
SSB,CW,RTTY:01=0.1 sec. to 13=6.0 sec.)
05 0001 p. 19-8 Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF settings
0002 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0003 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0004 p. 19-8 Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF settings
0005 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0006 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0007 p. 19-8 Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF settings
0008 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0009 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0010 p. 19-8 Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF settings
0011 p. 19-8 Send/read RTTY RX HPF/LPF settings
0012 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0013 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0014 p. 19-8 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for wide
0015 p. 19-8 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for mid
0016 p. 19-8 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for narrow
0017 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0018 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0019 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0020 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0021 0000 to
0255
Send/read beep gain
(0000=min. to 0255=max.)
0022 00/01 Send/read beep gain limit *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0023 00/01 Send/read conrmation beep
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0024 00 Send/read the band edge beep OFF
01 Send/read the band edge beep ON
(Beep sounds with a default amateur band)
02 Send/read the band edge beep with user
setting ON
03 Send/read the band edge beep with user
setting/TX limit ON
0025 00 to 02 Send/read the RF/SQL Control setting
(00=Auto, 01=SQL, 02=RF+SQL)
0026 00 to 05 Send/read the TX Delay setting (HF)
( 00=OFF, 01=10 ms, 02=15 ms, 03=20 ms,
04=25 ms, 05=30 ms)
0027 00 to 05 Send/read the TX Delay setting (50 MHz)
( 00=OFF, 01=10 ms, 02=15 ms, 03=20 ms,
04=25 ms, 05=30 ms)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
1A* 05 0028 00 to 05 Send/read the TX Delay setting (70 MHz)
( 00=OFF, 01=10 ms, 02=15 ms, 03=20 ms,
04=25 ms, 05=30 ms)
0029 00 to 05 Send/read the Time-Out Timer setting
( 00=OFF, 01=3 min., 02=5 min., 03=10min.,
04=20 min., 05=30 min.)
0030 00/01 Send/read quick split set *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0031 p. 19-9 Send/read FM split offset –9.999 to +9.999
MHz for HF
0032 p. 19-9 Send/read FM split offset –9.999 to +9.999
MHz for 50 MHz
0033 00/01 Send/read split lock set *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0034 00/01 Send/read [TUNER] Switch set
(00=Manual, 01=Auto)
0035 00 or 01 Send/read PTT tune set *(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0036 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY mark frequency
(00=1275 Hz, 01=1615 Hz, 02=2125 Hz)
0037 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY shift width
(00=170 Hz, 01=200 Hz, 02=425 Hz)
0038 00/01 Send/read RTTY keying polarity
(00=Normal, 01=Reverse)
0039 00/01 Send/read speech language
(00=English, 01=Japanese)
0040 00/01 Send/read speech speed (00=Low, 01=High)
0041 00/01 Send/read S-level speech (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0042 00/01 Send/read speech with a mode switch
operation (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0043 0000 to
0255
Send/read speech level
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0044 00/01 Send/read [SPEECH/LOCK] key function
setting
( 00=Push: SPEECH, Hold down: LOCK,
01=Push: LOCK, Hold down: SPEECH)
0045 00/01 Send/read the Lock function setting
(00=MAIN DIAL, 01=PANEL)
0046 00/01 Send/read memo pad numbers
(00=5 ch, 01=10 ch)
0047 00 to 02 Send/read main dial auto TS
(00=OFF, 01=Low, 02=High)
0048 00/01 Send/read mic. up/down speed
(00=Low, 01=High)
0049 00 or 01
Send/read quick RIT/∂TX clear function
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0050 00 to 02 Send/read SSB notch operation
*(00=Auto, 01=Manual, 02=Auto/Manual)
0051 00 to 02 Send/read AM notch operation
(00=Auto, 01=Manual, 02=Auto/Manual)
0052 00/01 Send/read SSB/CW synchronous tuning
function (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0053 00/01 Send/read CW normal side set
(00=LSB, 01=USB)
0054 00/01 Send/read screen capture by the [POWER]
switch (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0055 00/01 Send/read screen capture image data saving
format (00=PNG format, 01=BMP format)
0056 00/01 Send/read keyboard type
(00=Ten-key, 01=Full Keyboard)
0057 00/01 Send/read calibration marker
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0058 0000 to
0255
Send/read reference frequency
(0000=0%,0255=100%)
0059 00 or 01 Send/read AF/IF signal output to ACC/USB
(00=AF, 01=IF)
0060 0000 to
0255
Send/read AF output level to ACC/USB
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0061 00/01 Send/read squelch function for the AF signal
output to ACC/USB
(00=OFF (Open), 01=ON)
0062 00/01 Send/read beep and speech output setting to
ACC/USB (when AF signal output is set)
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0063 0000 to
0255
Send/read IF signal output level to ACC/USB
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
D Command table (Continued)
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-5
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
1A* 05 0064 0000 to
0255
Send/read MOD input level from ACC
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0065 0000 to
0255
Send/read MOD input level from USB
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0066 00 to 03 Send/read MOD input connector during
DATA OFF
(00=MIC, 01=ACC, 02=MIC/ACC, 03=USB)
0067 00 to 03 Send/read MOD input connector during DATA
(00=MIC, 01=ACC, 02=MIC/ACC, 03=USB)
0068 00/01
Send/read the external keypad setting for
VOICE
*(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0069 00/01 Send/read the external keypad setting for
Memory KEYER (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0070 00/01 Send/read the external keypad setting for
RTTY Memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0071 00/01 Send/read the CI-V transceive setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0072 0000 to
0223
Send/read the transceive CI-V Address for
USB to REMOTE in hexadecimal code
(0000=00h to 0223=DFh)
0073 00/01 Send/read the CI-V Output (for ANT)
capability (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0074 00/01 Send/read the CI-V USB port setting
(00=Link to [REMOTE], 01=Unlink to
[REMOTE]) (Read only)
0075 00/01 Send/read echo back setting for CI-V
operation from USB (00=ON, 01=OFF)
0076 00/01
Send/read the USB (serial port) function
setting
(00=CI-V, 01=RTTY Decode)
0077 00 to 03 Send/read data transfer speed for RTTY
decode output
( 00=4800 bps, 01=9600 bps, 02=19200 bps,
03=38400 bps)
0078 00 to 02 Send/read transmission control line setting
for USB
(00=OFF, 01=DTR, 02=RTS)
• Different line must be set from both CW
keying and RTTY (FSK)
0079 00 to 02 Send/read CW keying line setting for USB
(00=OFF, 01= DTR, 02=RTS)
• Different line must be set from both
transmisson control and RTTY (FSK)
0080 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY (FSK) line setting for USB
(00=OFF, 01=DTR, 02=RTS)
• Different line must be set from both CW
keying and transmission control"
0081 0000 to
0255
Send/read LCD unit backlight brightness
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0082 00/01 Send/read screen image type (00=A, 01=B)
0083 00/01 Send/read frequency readout font
(00=Basic, 01=Round)
0084 00/01 Send/read peak hold set for meter
*(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0085 00/01 Send/read memory name indication setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0086 00/01 Send/read manual notch width pop-up
indication setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0087 00/01 Send/read PBT shifting value display setting
while rotating [TWIN PBT] (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0088 00/01 Send/read IF lter width and shifting value
display setting when the IF lter is switched
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0089 00 to 03 Send/read screen saver function
( 00=OFF, 01=15 minutes, 02=30 minutes,
03=60 minutes)
0090 00/01 Send/read opening message indication
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0091 p. 19-9 Send/read opening message contents
(up to 10-character)
0092 00/01 Send/read Power ON Check setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
1A* 05 0093 00/01 Send/read Display Language
(00=English, 01=Japanese)
0094 20000101
to
20991231
Send/read date setting
( 20000101=2000/01/01 to
20991231=2099/12/31)
0095 0000 to
2359
Send/read time setting
(0000=00:00 to 2359=23:59)
0096 p. 19-11 Send/read UTC offset time
0097 00/01 Send/read scope indication during TX
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0098 00 to 02 Send/read scope max. hold
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0099 00 to 02 Send/read scope center frequency set
( 00=Filter center, 01=Carrier point center,
02=Carrier point center (Abs. Freq.)
0100 00/01 Send/read scope marker position setting
during x type scope
(00=Filter center, 01 Carrier point)
0101 00/01 Send/read external monitor signal width
(00=Narrow, 01=Wide)
0102 00 to 03 Send/read avaraging function for spectrum
scope (00=OFF, 01=2, 02=3, 03=4)
0103 00/01 Send/read spectrum display type
(00=Fill, 01=Fill+Line)
0104 p. 19-8 Send/read spectrum ll color
0105 p. 19-8 Send/read spectrum line color
0106 p. 19-8 Send/read spectrum color for peak hold
0107 00/01 Send/read waterfall set for spectrum scope
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0108 00 to 02 Send/read waterfall speed
(00=Slow, 01=Mid, 02=Fast)
0109 00 to 02 Send/read waterfall height when expanded
scope is selected
(00=Small, 01=Mid, 02=Larger)
0110 00 to 07 Send/read peak color level set for waterfall of
the spectrum scope
( 00=Grid 1, 01=Grid 2, 02=Grid 3, 03=Grid 4,
04=Grid 5, 05=Grid 6, 06=Grid 7, 07=Grid 8)
0111 00/01 Send/read scope waterfall marker auto-hide
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0112 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 0.03
to 1.60 MHz band
0113 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 0.03
to 1.60 MHz band
0114 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 0.03
to 1.60 MHz band
0115 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 1.60
to 2.00 MHz band
0116 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 1.60
to 2.00 MHz band
0117 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 1.60
to 2.00 MHz band
0118 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 2.00
to 6.00 MHz band
0119 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 2.00
to 6.00 MHz band
0120 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 2.00
to 6.00 MHz band
0121 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 6.00
to 8.00 MHz band
0122 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 6.00
to 8.00 MHz band
0123 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 6.00
to 8.00 MHz band
0124 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 8.00
to 11.00 MHz band
0125 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 8.00
to 11.00 MHz band
0126 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 8.00
to 11.00 MHz band
0127 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
11.00 to 15.00 MHz band
0128 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
11.00 to 15.00 MHz band
D Command table (Continued)
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-6
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
1A* 05 0129 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for
11.00 to 15.00 MHz band
0130 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
15.00 to 20.00 MHz band
0131 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
15.00 to 20.00 MHz band
0132 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for
15.00 to 20.00 MHz band
0133 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
20.00 to 22.00 MHz band
0134 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
20.00 to 22.00 MHz band
0135 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for
20.00 to 22.00 MHz band
0136 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
22.00 to 26.00 MHz band
0137 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
22.00 to 26.00 MHz band
0138 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for
22.00 to 26.00 MHz band
0139 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
26.00 to 30.00 MHz band
0140 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
26.00 to 30.00 MHz band
0141 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for
26.00 to 30.00 MHz band
0142 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
30.00 to 45.00 MHz band
0143 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
30.00 to 45.00 MHz band
0144 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
30.00 to 45.00 MHz band
0145 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
45.00 to 60.00 MHz band
0146 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
45.00 to 60.00 MHz band
0147 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for
45.00 to 60.00 MHz band
0148 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for
60.00 to 74.80 MHz band
0149 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for
60.00 to 74.80 MHz band
0150 p. 19-8 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for
60.00 to 74.80 MHz band
0151 00/01 Send/read audio FFT scope display type
(00=Fill, 01=Fill+Line)
0152 p. 19-8 Send/read the Audio FFT scope waveform
color
0153 00/01 Send/read the Audio FFT scope waterfall
display (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0154 p. 19-8 Send/read the Audio Oscilloscope scope
waveform color
0155 00 Normal selection for contest number style
01
“190→ANO” selection for contest number style
02
“190→ANT” selection for contest number style
03 “90→NO” selection for contest number style
04 “90→NT” selection for contest number style
0156 01 to 08 Send/read count up trigger channel
( 01=M1, 02=M2, 03=M3, 04=M4, 05=M5,
06=M6, 07=M7, 08=M8)
0157 0001 to
9999
Send/read present number
(0001=1 to 9999=9999)
0158 0000 to
0255
Send/read CW side tone gain
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0159 00/01 Send/read CW side tone gain limit
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0160 01 to 60 Send/read CW keyer repeat time
(01=1 sec. to 60=60 sec.)
0161 28 to 45 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash ratio
(28=1:1:2.8 to 45=1:1:4.5)
0162 00 to 03 Send/read rise time
( 00=2 msec., 01=4 msec., 02=6 msec.,
03=8 msec.)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
1A* 05 0163 00/01 Send/read paddle polarity
(00=Normal, 01=Reverse)
0164 00 to 02 Send/read keyer type
(00=Straight, 01=Bug, 02=Paddle)
0165 00/01 Send/read mic. up/down keyer set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0166 00 to 03 Send/read avaraging function for RTTY FFT
scope (00=OFF, 01=2, 02=3, 03=4)
0167 p. 19-8 Send/read RTTY FFT scope waveform color
0168 00/01 Send/read RTTY decode USOS
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0169 00/01 Send/read RTTY decode new line code
(00=CR,LF,CR+LF, 01=CR+LF)
0170 00/01 Send/read RTTY TX USOS
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0171 p. 19-8 Send/read received RTTY text font color
0172 p. 19-8 Send/read transmitted RTTY text font color
0173 00/01 Send/read RTTY log function
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0174 00/01 Send/read le saving format for the
RTTY log (00=Text, 01=HTML)
0175 00/01 Send/read RTTY time stamp set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0176 00/01 Send/read RTTY Decode Log Time Stamp
(00=Local, 01=UTC)
0177 00/01 Send/read RTTY frequency stamp
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0178 00/01 Send/read scan speed (00=Low, 01=High)
0179 00/01 Send/read scan resume (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0180 00/01 Send/read auto monitor function setting when
transmitting a recorded voice memory
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0181 01/15 Send/read repeat interval to transmit recorded
voice audio
(01=1 sec. to 15=15 sec.)
0182 00/01 Send/read recording mode for QSO recorder
(00=TX&RX, 01=RX Only)
0183 00/01 Send/read recording TX audio for QSO
recorder
(00=Microphone audio, 01=TX monitor audio)
0184 00/01 Send/read squelch relation to recording
RX audio for QSO recorder
(00=Always, 01=Squelch Auto)
0185 00/01 Send/read QSO record le split function
setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0186 00/01 Send/read PTT Automatic Recording function
setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0187 00 to 03 Send/read RX audio recording status for PTT
Automatic Recording function
( 00=OFF (records no RX audio),
01=Records the RX audio just before 5 sec.,
02=Records the RX audio just before 10 sec.,
03=Records the RX audio just before 15 sec.)
0188 00 to 03 Send/read QSO PLAY Skip time
(00=3 sec., 01=5 sec., 02=10 sec., 03=30 sec.)
0189 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (00=1 to 09=10)
0190 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB width (0000=1 to 0255=100)
0191 00 to 20 Send/read VOX delay
(00=0.0 sec. to 20=2.0 sec.)
0192 00 to 03 Send/read VOX voice delay
(00=OFF, 01=Short, 02=Mid., 03=Long)
0193 00/01 Send/read the MF band attenuator setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
06 p. 19-9 Send/read DATA mode setting
07 00/01 Send/read IP+ function setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
1B* 00 p. 19-11 Send/read repeater tone frequency
01 p. 19-11 Set/read TSQL tone frequency
D Command table (Continued)
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-7
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
1C 00* 00 Send/read transceiver’s status RX
• When CI-V Output (for ANT) (Command:
1A 05 0157) is set to ON, automatically
outputs when changed.
01 Send/read transceiver’s status TX
• When CI-V Output (for ANT) (Command:
1A 05 0157) is set to ON, automatically
outputs when changed.
01* 00 to 02 00=Send/read the antenna tuner OFF
01=Send/read the antenna tuner ON
02=Send/read to tuning
02* 00/01 Send/read transmit frequency monitor setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
03 p. 19-8 Read transmit frequency
• When CI-V Output (for ANT) (Command:
1A 05 0157) is set to ON, automatically
outputs when changed.
04* 00/01 Send/read command to disable to output the
antenna controller status frequency and so on
from [REMOTE]
• Send/read command to enable to output the
antenna controller status frequency and so
on from [REMOTE].
1E 00 Read number of available TX frequency band
01 p. 19-8 Read TX band edge frequencies
02 Read number of user-set TX frequency band
03* p. 19-8
Send/read user-set TX band edge frequencies
21* 00 p. 19-11 Send/read RIT frequency
01 00/01 Send/read RIT setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
02 00/01
Send/read ∂TX setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
25* p. 19-11 Send/read the selected or unselected VFO
frequency
26* p. 19-11 Send/read the selected or unselected VFO’s
operating mode and lter
27* 00 p. 19-12 Read the Scope waveform data
• Only when “Scope ON/OFF status”
(Command: 27 10) and “Scope data output”
(Command: 27 20) are set to “ON,” outputs
the waveform data to the controller.
10 00/01 Send/read the Scope ON/OFF status
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
11 00/01 Send/read the Scope wave data output*4
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
12 00 Send/read the Main or Sub scope setting
(00=Main only)
13 00 Send/read the Single/Dual scope setting
(00=Single only)
14 p. 19-12 Send/read the Scope Center mode or Fixed
mode setting
15 p. 19-12 Send/read the span setting in the Center
mode Scope
16 p. 19-12 Send/read the Edge number setting in the
Fixed mode Scope
17 p. 19-12
Send/read the Scope hold function ON or OFF
19 p. 19-12 Send/read the Scope Reference level setting
1A p. 19-13 Send/read the Sweep speed setting
1B 00/01 Send/read the Scope indication during TX in
the Center mode (00=OFF, 01=ON)
1C 00 to 02 Send/read scope center frequency setting in
the Center mode
( 00=Filter center, 01=Carrier point center,
02=Carrier point center (Abs. Freq.)
1D p. 19-13 Send/read the Scope VBW setting
1E p. 19-13 Send/read the Scope Fixed edge frequencies
D Command table (Continued)
* (Asterisk) Send/read data
*1 To insert a counter, rst clear the other channel’s counter.
*2 In the CW mode, if the [TRANSMIT] or an external TX
switch is ON, or the Break-in function is ON, a message
will be transmitted as CW code when you send it from
your PC.
*3 When sending the power ON command (18 01), you need
to repeatedly send “FE” before the standard format. The
following is the approximated quantity of the repetition.
• 115200 bps: 150 “FE”s
• 57600 bps: 75 “FE”s
• 38400 bps: 50 “FE”s
• 19200 bps: 25 “FE”s
• 9600 bps: 13 “FE”s
• 4800 bps: 7 “FE”s
Example: When using 4800 bps
F
F E
x7
49EFE E 1081O DF
*4 You can only set this item when “Unlink from [REMOTE]”
is selected on the “CI-V USB port” screen, and then
“115200” is selected on the “CI-V Baud Rate” screen.
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-8
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
D Data content description
• Operating frequency
Command: 00, 03, 05, 1C 03
q
XXXXX
we
X
rt
X
X0
0
10 Hz digit:
0–9
1 Hz digit:
0–9
1 kHz digit:
0–9
100 Hz digit:
0–9
100 kHz digit:
0–9
10 kHz digit:
0–9
10 MHz digit:
0–6
1 MHz digit:
0–9
1000 MHz digit:
0
(Fix
ed)
100 MHz digit:
0
(Fix
ed)
• Operating mode
Command: 01, 04, 06
Filter setting (w) can be skipped with command 01
and 06. In that case, “FIL1” is selected with command
01 and the default lter setting of the operating mode
is automatically selected with command 06.
q
XXXX
w
q Operating mode w Filter setting
00: LSB 05: FM 01: FIL1
01: USB 07: CW-R 02: FIL2
02: AM 08: RTTY-R 03: FIL3
03: CW
04: RTTY
• SSB transmission passband width settings
Command : 1A 050014, 050015, 050016
XX
Higher edge: 0= 2500 Hz
1= 2700 Hz
2= 2800 Hz
3= 2900 Hz
Lower edge: 0= 100 Hz
1= 200 Hz
2= 300 Hz
3= 500 Hz
• RX HPF/LPF setting for each operating mode
Command : 1A 050001, 050004, 050007, 050010,
050011
X X X X
LPF (Upper edge)
HPF (Lower edge)
*The value of the HPF should be smaller than the LPF.
HPF
00: Through
01~20: 100~2000 Hz
LPF
05~24: 500~2400 Hz
25: Through
• Bandscope edge frequency settings
Command: 1A 050112~050150
1 kHz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz: 0–9
10 kHz: 0–9
10 MHz: 0–6
1 MHz: 0–9
1 kHz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz: 0–9
10 kHz: 0–9
10 MHz: 0–6
1 MHz: 0–9
q
X 0 X X X X X 0 X X X X
w e r t y
Lower edge Higher edge
• Color settings
Command : 1A 050104, 050105, 050106, 050152,
050154, 050167, 050171, 050172
q
0 XXX0XXX0 XXX
werty
R (Red)
0000–0255
G (Green)
0000–0255
B (Blue)
0000–0255
• Band edge frequency settings
Command : 02*, 1E 01, 1E 03
q
X X X
w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2
X X X X X X X 0 0 2 D X X X X X X X X 0 0
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
Separator (fixed)
Lower edge Higher edge
Edge number*: 01–30
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-9
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
• Band stacking register
Command: 1A 01
q
XXXX
w
q Frequency band codes
Code Freq. band Frequency range (unit: MHz)
01 1.8 1.800000–1.999999
02 3.5 3.400000–4.099999
03 7 6.900000–7.499999
04 10 9.900000–10.499999
05 14 13.900000–14.499999
06 18 17.900000–18.499999
07 21 20.900000–21.499999
08 24 24.400000–25.099999
09 28 28.000000–29.999999
10 50 50.000000–54.000000
11 GENE Other than above
w Register codes
Code Registered number
01 1 (latest)
02 2
03 3 (oldest)
For example, when sending/reading the oldest
contents in the 21 MHz band, the code “0703” is used.
• Offset frequency settings
Command : 1A 050031, 050032
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–9
†
1 MHz digit: 0–9
Direction:
00=+ direction
01=– direction
q
0XXXXXX
we
0
r*
*1 There is no need to enter the transverter offset frequency setting.
*2
Transverter offset only. Fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.
• Codes for character entries
- Character codes— Letters and Numbers
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
A–Z 41–5A a-z 61–7A
0–9 30–39
- Character codes— Symbols
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
! 21 # 23
$ 24 % 25
& 26 \ 5C
? 3F ” 22
’ 27 ` 60
^ 5E + 2B
− 2D
✱
2A
/ 2F . 2E
, 2C : 3A
; 3B = 3D
< 3C > 3E
( 28 ) 29
[ 5B ] 5D
{ 7B } 7D
| 7C _ 5F
͂ 7E @ 40
Command Set item/selectable characters
1A 00 Memory name
All characters are usable.
1A 050091 Opening message
Uppercase letters, numbers, symbols
(− / . @) and space are usable.
• Data mode with lter width settings
Command : 1A 06
q
X X X X
w
01=FIL1
02=FIL2
03=FIL3
00=Data mode OFF*
01=Data mode ON
*When 00 is set, also set 00 to w
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-10
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
• Memory keyer character entries
Command: 1A 02
- Character codes
Character ASCII code Description
0–9 30–39 Numbers
A–Z 41–5A Letters
space 20 Word space
/ 2F Symbol
? 3F Symbol
, 2C Symbol
. 2E Symbol
@ 40 Symbol
^ 5E Example: to send
BT, enter ^4254
✱
2A Inserts contest number
(can be used for 1 channel only)
X
q: Channel data
01： M1 05：
M5
02： M2 06：
M6
03: M3 07: M7
04: M4 08: M8
w–&1: Text data
X X X
……
X X
• Memory keyer content
Command: 1A 02
• Memory content
Command : 1A 00
X
e r−i o, !0 !1 !2−!4 !5−!7
X X X ... ...X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X
q, w !8−@7
q, w Memory channel numbers
0001–0099: Memory channel 01 to 99
0100: Programmed scan edge P1
0101: Programmed scan edge P2
e Select memory setting
LSet 0 for P1 and P2.
r~i Operating frequency setting
See “• Operating frequency.”
o, !0 Operating mode setting
See “• Operating mode.”
!1 Data mode and tone type settings
!2~!4 Repeater tone frequency setting
!5~!7 Tone squelch frequency setting
See “• Repeater tone/tone squelch settings.”
!8~@7 Memory name settings
Up to 10 characters.
See “• Codes for character entries”
To clear the memory channel contents on 1A 00:
q,w: Memory channel (0001~0099)
e: “FF”
r: None
0X
e
0=OFF
Fixed
1= 1
2= 2
3= 3
X X
!1
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL
0=Data mode OFF
1=Data mode ON
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-11
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
• Codes for CW message contents
Command : 17 Up to 30 characters
To send CW messages, use the following character
codes.
Character ASCII code
0–9 30–39
A–Z 41–5A
a–z 61–7A
/ 2F
? 3F
. 2E
− 2D
, 2C
: 3A
Character ASCII code
’ 27
( 28
) 29
= 3D
+ 2B
” 22
@ 40
Space 20
L“FF” stops sending CW messages.
L “^” is used to transmit a string of characters with no
inter-character space.
• RIT frequency settings
Command : 21 00
10 Hz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0–9
1 Hz: 0–9
1 kHz: 0–9
XXXX XX
00: + (plus)
01: – (minus)
• Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency settings
Command : 1B 00, 1B 01
100Hz digit: 0–2
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
0.1 Hz digit: 0–9
Fixed digit: 0*
Fixed digit: 0*
q*
00X
XX
we
X
*Not necessary when setting a frequency.
• UTC Offset setting
Command : 1A 05 0096
X
Shift direction
00: + (plus)
01: − (minus)
Offset time
0000−1400
XXX XX
• Selected or unselected VFO frequency settings
Command: 25
X X X X X X X X X X 0 0
00: Selected VFO
01: Unselected VFO
Operating frequency data
• Selected or unselected VFO’s operating mode
and lter settings
Command: 26
Both data and lter settings can be skipped. In that
case, “DATA OFF” and the default lter setting of the
operating mode are automatically selected.
X X X X X XX X
q
Operating mode setting
e
Filter setting
w
Data mode setting
00: Selected VFO
01: Unselected VFO
q Operating mode w Data mode setting
e Filter
setting
00: LSB 05: FM 00: Data mode OFF 01: FIL1
01: USB 07: CW-R 01: Data mode ON 02: FIL2
02: AM 08: RTTY-R 03: FIL3
03: CW
04: RTTY
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-12
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
• Scope waveform data
Command : 27 00
Outputs the waveform data to the controller
X XX X0 0 X XX XX X X X ...... X X
q w e r t y u
Fixed
w Division number (Current): 01~11
e Division number (Maximum): 11 (USB)
When sent through the USB port, the data is
divided by 11 and sent in sequential order.
The 1st data sends only the wave information (q ~
y) without the waveform data (u).
The 2nd or later data sends the minimum wave
information (q ~ e) with waveform data (u).
r Center or Fixed mode data
• 00 = Center mode scope, 01 = Fixed mode scope
t Waveform information
The waveform information is different between
Center mode and xed mode.
• In the Center mode: Center frequency and span
are sent.
See page 19-9 for Frequency data, and the Scope
span settings to the right.
• In the Fixed mode: Lower edge and higher edge
frequencies are sent.
See page 19-14 for Scope Fixed edge frequency
settings e ~ !2.
y Out of range information
• 00 = In range, 01 = Out of range
If the scope data is out of range, the waveform
data (u) is omitted.
u Waveform data
The transceiver outputs the drawn waveform data.
The data range or data length of the waveform
data is judged by the controller. (The data range is
basically the same as the display size of the scope
on the controller.)
Data range 0~160
Data length 475
• Center/Fixed mode settings
Command: 27 14
0 0 X X
00=Center mode
01=Fixed mode
Fixed
• Scope span settings
Command : 27 15
0 0 0 0 X X X X 0 0 0 0
0 (Fixed)
q
1 kHz digit: 0, 2, 5
100 Hz digit: 0, 5
100 kHz digit: 0, 1, 2, 5
10 kHz digit: 0, 1, 2, 5
10 Hz digit: 0 (Fixed)
1 Hz digit: 0 (Fixed)
10 MHz digit: 0 (Fixed)
1 MHz digit: 0 (Fixed)
1 GHz digit: 0 (Fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
w e r t y
Span (Hz)
2500 2.5 k
5000 5 k
10000 10 k
25000 25 k
50000 50 k
100000 100 k
250000 250 k
500000 500 k
• Scope Edge number settings
Command: 27 16
0 0 X X
01=Edge 1
02=Edge 2
03=Edge 3
Fixed
• Scope Hold settings
Command: 27 17
0 0 X X
00=Hold OFF
01=Hold ON
Fixed
• Scope Reference level settings
Command : 27 19
0 0 X X X 0 X X
00= + (plus)
01= – (minus)
10 dB digit: 0, 1, 2
1 dB digit: 0–9
0.1 dB digit: 0, 5
0.01 dB digit: 0
(Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
L Adjustable range: –20.0 dB ~ +20.0 dB in 0.5 dB steps
19
CONTROL COMMAND
19-13
Remote control (CI-V) information (Continued)
• Scope Sweep speed settings
Command : 27 1A
0 0 X X
00=FAST
01=MID
02=SLOW
Fixed
• Scope VBW (Video Band Width) settings
Command : 27 1D
0 0 X X
00=Narrow
01=Wide
Fixed
• Scope Fixed edge frequency settings
Command : 27 1E
q
0 XX X X
w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2
X X X X X X X 0 0 X X X X X X X X 0 0
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
Frequency range
Lower edge Higher edge
Edge number: 01–03
L Entry of 100 Hz or smaller digits are ignored.
q Selectable Frequency ranges
Data Frequency range (Hz)
01 0.03 – 1.60
02 1.60 – 2.00
03 2.00 – 6.00
04 6.00 – 8.00
05 8.00 – 11.00
06 11.00 – 15.00
07 15.00 – 20.00
08 20.00 – 22.00
09 22.00 – 26.00
10 26.00 – 30.00
11 30.00 – 45.00
12 45.00 – 60.00
13 60.00 – 74.80
w Selectable Edge number: 01 = 1, 02 = 2, 03 = 3
I-1
INDEX
Symbols and numbers
∂F scan ....................................................................................... 10-6
Operation ................................................................................ 10-6
∂TX
Function ...................................................................................4-11
Monitor function .......................................................................4-11
1/4 Tuning function ........................................................................ 3-5
5 MHz frequency band operation ................................................ 3-12
A
ACC
ACC AF Beep/Speech... Output ............................................. 12-7
ACC AF Output Level ............................................................. 12-7
ACC AF SQL .......................................................................... 12-7
ACC IF Output Level .............................................................. 12-7
ACC Output Select ............................................................... 12-7
MOD Level ............................................................................. 12-7
Socket, about ......................................................................... 18-2
Accessories, supplied ....................................................................... i
Adobe® Reader® Installer .............................................................. iii
AGC
Function control ........................................................................ 4-4
Time constant preset value, selecting ..................................... 4-4
Time constant, setting .............................................................. 4-4
AH-4, using ..................................................................................11-3
AH-740, using ...............................................................................11-3
ALC jack, about ......................................................................... 18-4
All Reset ....................................................................................14-11
AM, tone control
RX Bass ................................................................................. 12-3
RXaudioHigh/Lowpassltersetting .................................... 12-3
TX Bass ................................................................................ 12-3
TX Treble .............................................................................. 12-3
Antenna tuner
Connecting ............................................................................... 2-4
External ...................................................................................11-3
Internal ................................................................................... 11-2
ANTI VOX .................................................................................. 4-10
Attenuator .................................................................................... 4-3
Audio scope
Screen .................................................................................... 5-9
Set screen .............................................................................. 5-9
Auto
Monitor (VOICE TX SET) ....................................................... 7-6
Notch function ........................................................................ 4-9
Tuning Step function ............................................................... 3-5
Averaging (Scope set screen) ...................................................... 5-6
B
Backlight .................................................................................. 12-10
Band Edge
Beep ......................................................................................... 3-6
Deleting .................................................................................... 3-8
Editing .................................................................................... 3-7
Entering .................................................................................... 3-7
Inserting .................................................................................... 3-9
New entry ............................................................................... 3-8
Resetting ................................................................................ 3-9
Band stacking registers, using ..................................................... 3-3
Basic manual .................................................................................. iii
Beep
Conrmation ........................................................................... 12-4
Level ..................................................................................... 12-4
Level Limit ............................................................................ 12-4
Break-in function ........................................................................ 4-15
Full ....................................................................................... 4-16
Semi ...................................................................................... 4-15
C
Calibration Marker ..................................................................... 12-7
Captured screen, viewing .......................................................... 13-5
Capturing a screen .................................................................... 13-5
CD
Contents ..................................................................................... iii
Starting the CD ............................................................................ iii
Center mode ................................................................................ 5-3
CENTER Type Display ................................................................. 5-6
CI-V
Address ................................................................................ 12-8
Baud Rate ............................................................................ 12-8
Command table .................................................................... 19-3
Connection ........................................................................... 19-2
Data format ........................................................................... 19-2
Output (for ANT) ................................................................... 12-8
Preparing .............................................................................. 19-2
Transceive ............................................................................ 12-8
USB Baud Rate .................................................................... 12-9
USB Echo Back .................................................................... 12-9
USB Port .............................................................................. 12-8
USB→REMOTETransceiveAddress ................................... 12-8
Cleaning .................................................................................... 14-2
Clock ..................................................................................... 12-11
Connections
Front panel ............................................................................. 2-2
FSK and AFSK ....................................................................... 2-5
Linearamplier ....................................................................... 2-6
Non-Icomlinearamplier ....................................................... 2-6
Rear panel .............................................................................. 2-3
Connectors (Set mode) ............................................................. 12-7
Contest number menu (001 SET) .............................................. 4-20
CW
Auto Tuning function ............................................................. 4-16
Dot/Dash Ratio ..................................................................... 4-21
Full Break-in mode ............................................................... 4-16
Normal Side (LSB/USB) ........................................................ 12-6
Operating .............................................................................. 4-14
Paddle Polarity ..................................................................... 4-21
Pitch control, setting ............................................................. 4-14
Reverse mode ...................................................................... 4-16
RXaudioHigh/Lowpassltersetting .................................... 12-3
Semi Break-in mode ............................................................. 4-15
Side tone, monitoring ........................................................... 4-17
D
DATA MOD (Modulation signal) .................................................. 12-8
Data mode
(AFSK) operation .................................................................. 4-31
Selecting ................................................................................. 3-3
DATA OFF MOD ........................................................................ 12-8
Date (Set mode) ....................................................................... 12-11
DC power socket, about ............................................................ 18-4
Decoder
New Line Code ..................................................................... 4-28
Threshold level, setting ........................................................ 4-23
Decode USOS ........................................................................... 4-28
DELAY (VOX) ............................................................................ 4-10
Deleting (Voice recorder)
Allles .................................................................................... 6-5
File ......................................................................................... 6-5
Folder ..................................................................................... 6-6
DEPTH (Noise Blanker) ............................................................... 4-8
Dial Lock function ...................................................................... 3-10
Display
Background, selecting .......................................................... 13-3
Font (Set mode) .................................................................. 12-10
Font, selecting ...................................................................... 13-3
Language ........................................................................... 12-10
Type (Background color) ..................................................... 12-10
Type, selecting (Background color) ....................................... 13-3
INDEX
I-2
E
Emergency
Mode, tuner .......................................................................... 11-4
Set mode ............................................................................ 12-11
Entering and editing ..................................................................... 1-8
Characters .............................................................................. 1-8
Example ................................................................................. 1-9
External DC power supply, connecting ........................................ 2-4
EXT-SP jack .............................................................................. 18-4
F
FEATURES ...................................................................................... i
FFT Scope
Averaging ............................................................................. 4-28
Waterfall Display ..................................................................... 5-9
Waveform Color ............................................................. 4-28, 5-9
Waveform Type ...................................................................... 5-9
File Type (RTTY decode log) ..................................................... 4-27
Fine ∂F scan ............................................................................. 10-6
Operation .............................................................................. 10-6
Fine Programmed scan .............................................................10-3
Operation .............................................................................. 10-3
Fine Tuning function (1 Hz step) .................................................. 3-4
Firmware update ........................................................................ 15-2
Preparation ........................................................................... 15-3
Set mode ............................................................................ 12-11
Unzippingthermwarefolder ............................................... 15-4
Updating ............................................................................... 15-5
Firmware version, checking ....................................................... 15-2
Fixed Edges ................................................................................. 5-7
Fixed mode .................................................................................. 5-3
FM
Repeater operation ............................................................... 4-29
RXaudioHigh/Lowpassltersetting .................................... 12-3
RX Bass ............................................................................... 12-3
RX Treble ............................................................................. 12-3
SPLIT Offset (HF) ................................................................. 12-5
TX Bass ................................................................................ 12-3
TX Treble .............................................................................. 12-3
Font
Color (Receive/Transmit characters) .................................... 4-28
Selecting ............................................................................... 13-3
Format (SD Card) ........................................................................ 8-3
Front panel .................................................................................. 1-2
Full Break-in mode .................................................................... 4-16
FUNCTION screen ...................................................................... 1-7
List ......................................................................................... 1-7
Function (Set mode) .................................................................. 12-4
Fuse ....................................................................................... 14-2
G
Grounding .................................................................................... 2-2
H
HAM radio Terms ............................................................................ iii
Heat dissipation ........................................................................... 2-2
I
IC-PW1, connecting ..................................................................... 2-6
IC-PW1EURO, connecting .......................................................... 2-6
IFlter
Selecting ................................................................................. 4-6
Shape, selecting ..................................................................... 4-6
IP Plus function ............................................................................ 4-7
K
Key
KEY jack, about .................................................................... 18-4
Speed, setting ...................................................................... 4-15
Type (Keyer set menu) .......................................................... 4-21
Keyboard
Characters .............................................................................. 1-8
Entering and editing ............................................................... 1-8
Example ................................................................................. 1-9
Types ............................................................................. 1-8, 12-7
Keyer
Function, electronic .............................................................. 4-17
Memory edit menu (EDIT) .................................................... 4-19
Repeat time .......................................................................... 4-21
Set menu (CW-KEY SET) .................................................... 4-21
Keypad
Connecting ........................................................................... 18-3
Keypad KEYER .................................................................... 12-8
Keypad RTTY ....................................................................... 12-8
Keypad VOICE ..................................................................... 12-8
L
LEVEL (Noise Blanker) ................................................................ 4-8
Load Setting (SD Card) ............................................................... 8-6
Lock Function, about ................................................................. 12-6
M
MAIN DIAL Auto TS ................................................................... 12-6
Main dial
Friction, adjusting ................................................................. 13-2
Using ...................................................................................... 3-4
Marker ......................................................................................... 5-3
Position (Fix Type) .................................................................. 5-6
RX Marker .............................................................................. 5-3
Types ...................................................................................... 5-3
MB-118, mounting ..................................................................... 17-3
MB-123, attaching ..................................................................... 17-3
Memo Pad ................................................................................... 9-6
Calling up ............................................................................... 9-6
List, using ............................................................................... 9-6
Quantity ................................................................................ 12-6
Saving the displayed contents ................................................ 9-6
Memory channel contents
Copying .................................................................................. 9-4
to another memory channel ............................................ 9-4
to the VFO ....................................................................... 9-4
Entering .................................................................................. 9-3
in the Memory mode ....................................................... 9-3
in the VFO mode ............................................................. 9-3
Memory channel .......................................................................... 9-2
Clearing .................................................................................. 9-4
Entering .................................................................................. 3-6
Selecting ................................................................................. 9-2
in the MEMORY screen .................................................. 9-3
using a keypad ................................................................ 9-2
with the up and down keys .............................................. 9-2
Memory keyer (KEYER) .................................................. 4-17~4-19
Memory
Mode ...................................................................................... 3-2
Name (Set mode) ................................................................ 12-10
Name, entering ....................................................................... 9-5
Operation .............................................................................. 10-4
Scan ..................................................................................... 10-4
Screen .................................................................................... 9-5
MENU screen .............................................................................. 1-7
Meter display ............................................................................. 3-11
Selection ............................................................................... 3-11
Meter Peak Hold ...................................................................... 12-10
MF Band ATT ............................................................................. 12-4
Microphone
Connector, about .................................................................. 18-3
Gain, adjusting ..................................................................... 3-11
MIC
Up/Down Keyer .................................................................... 4-21
Up/Down Speed ................................................................... 12-6
INDEX
I-3
Mini scope screen ........................................................................ 5-4
MODE SPEECH ........................................................................12-5
Monitor function ......................................................................... 4-11
Multi-function menu ..................................................................... 1-7
Items ....................................................................................... 1-7
Multi-function meter, selecting .................................................... 3-11
My Call (Set mode) ................................................................... 12-10
My call sign, displaying .............................................................. 13-5
N
Noise Blanker, about ................................................................... 4-8
Level and time, adjusting ........................................................ 4-8
Noise Reduction, about ............................................................... 4-9
Level, adjusting ...................................................................... 4-9
Noise squelch ............................................................................3-10
Notch function, about ................................................................... 4-9
Auto ........................................................................................ 4-9
Manual .................................................................................... 4-9
Width menu display .............................................................12-10
[NOTCH] Switch
AM ....................................................................................... 12-6
SSB ...................................................................................... 12-6
O
Opening Message ................................................................... 12-10
Operating band, selecting ............................................................ 3-3
Operating frequency
Entering .................................................................................. 3-5
Setting .................................................................................... 3-4
Operating mode, selecting ........................................................... 3-3
Options ...................................................................................... 17-2
Oscilloscope Waveform Color ..................................................... 5-9
Others (Set mode) ................................................................... 12-11
P
P.AMP1/2 ..................................................................................... 4-3
Partial Reset .............................................................................. 14-4
PHONES jack, about ................................................................. 18-4
PLAYER SET screen ................................................................... 6-9
Power
ON Check ........................................................................... 12-10
ON or OFF .............................................................................. 3-2
Whenrstapplying .................................................................. 3-2
Preampliers................................................................................ 4-3
Programmed scan ..................................................................... 10-3
Protection function ..................................................................... 13-4
Q
QSO audio
Playing back ........................................................................... 6-3
Recording ............................................................................... 6-2
QUICK MENU .............................................................................. 1-7
Quick recording ........................................................................... 6-2
Quick RIT/∂TX Clear ................................................................. 12-6
Quick Split function, using ......................................................... 4-13
Quick SPLIT (Set mode) ............................................................ 12-5
R
Rear panel ................................................................................... 1-4
RECORDER SET screen ............................................................ 6-8
Recording (Receive/transmit audio)
Basic recording ........................................................................ 6-2
Playing back ........................................................................... 6-3
QSO audio ...................................................................... 6-3
RecordedleonaPC ..................................................... 6-7
Voice TX memory ............................................................ 7-2
QSO audio .............................................................................. 6-2
Quick recording ...................................................................... 6-2
REF adjustment ......................................................................... 13-4
REF Adjust (Set mode) .............................................................. 12-7
Remote control (CI-V) information ............................................. 19-2
REMOTE jack, about ................................................................. 18-4
Repeater
Input signal, checking ........................................................... 4-30
Tone frequency, checking ..................................................... 4-29
Tone frequency, setting ........................................................ 4-29
Resetting ................................................................................... 14-4
All reset ................................................................................14-4
Partial reset .......................................................................... 14-4
RF gain ...................................................................................... 3-10
RF/SQL Control ......................................................................... 12-4
Rise Time ................................................................................... 4-21
RIT
Function .................................................................................. 4-3
Monitor function ...................................................................... 4-3
RTTY
Decode Baud Rate ............................................................... 12-9
Decode log set mode ........................................................... 4-27
DECODE screen, functions .................................................. 4-23
Decode set mode ................................................................. 4-28
FSK, operating ..................................................................... 4-22
Keying Polarity ..................................................................... 12-5
Log contents ......................................................................... 4-26
Log, turning ON .................................................................... 4-26
Mark Frequency ................................................................... 12-5
Memory content, transmitting ............................................... 4-24
Memory, editing .................................................................... 4-25
Reverse mode ...................................................................... 4-22
RXaudioHigh/Lowpassltersetting .................................... 12-3
Shift Width ............................................................................ 12-5
S
Scan
Fine ∂F scan ........................................................................ 10-6
Fine Programmed scan ........................................................10-3
Preparation ........................................................................... 10-2
Resume ................................................................................ 10-2
Set mode .............................................................................. 10-2
Speed ................................................................................... 10-2
Types .................................................................................... 10-2
Schematic diagram ......................................................................... iii
Screen Capture
Capture function ................................................................... 13-5
Capture [POWER] SW ......................................................... 12-7
File Type ............................................................................... 12-7
Viewing ............................................................................... 12-11
Screen Saver ........................................................................... 12-10
SD Card ....................................................................................... 8-2
Backing up the data saved onto a PC .................................... 8-8
BackupleonyourPC ........................................................... 8-9
Deletingadatale .................................................................. 8-7
Folder contents ....................................................................... 8-8
Formatting .............................................................................. 8-3
Information ...................................................................... 6-6, 8-7
Inserting .................................................................................. 8-2
Loadingthesaveddatales ................................................... 8-6
Removing ............................................................................... 8-2
Saving data ............................................................................ 8-2
Savingintheoldrmwareformat ........................................... 8-4
Saving the setting data ........................................................... 8-4
Savingwithadifferentlename ............................................ 8-5
Set mode ............................................................................ 12-11
Unmounting ............................................................................ 8-3
INDEX
I-4
Select Memory channel
Setting .................................................................................. 10-5
Settings, cancelling all .......................................................... 10-5
Select Memory scan ..................................................................10-4
Operation .............................................................................. 10-5
Semi Break-in mode .................................................................. 4-15
SEND jack, about ..................................................................... 18-4
Set mode
Entering ................................................................................ 12-2
Item description ....................................................................12-2
SHARP(IFltershape) ............................................................... 4-7
Side Tone
Level ..................................................................................... 4-21
Level Limit ............................................................................ 4-21
S-Level SPEECH ....................................................................... 12-5
S-meter squelch ........................................................................ 3-10
SOFT(IFltershape) .................................................................. 4-7
Specications ............................................................................ 16-2
Spectrum Scope
During TX (CENTER TYPE) ................................................... 5-6
Max Hold ................................................................................ 5-6
Reference level, adjusting ...................................................... 5-5
Screen .................................................................................... 5-2
Set screen .............................................................................. 5-6
Sweep speed .......................................................................... 5-5
Using ...................................................................................... 5-2
Waterfall ................................................................................. 5-7
Waveform ............................................................................... 5-7
Speech Compressor, setting ..................................................... 4-12
SPEECH
Function, using ..................................................................... 13-2
Language ............................................................................. 12-5
Level ..................................................................................... 12-6
Speed ................................................................................... 12-5
[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch ........................................................... 12-6
Split Frequency
Offset, entering ....................................................................... 3-6
Operation .............................................................................. 4-13
Split Lock function ..................................................................... 4-14
SPLIT LOCK (Set mode) ........................................................... 12-5
SQL level ................................................................................... 3-10
Squelch status ........................................................................... 10-2
SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning ................................................... 12-6
SSB, tone control
RX Bass ............................................................................... 12-3
RXaudioHi/Lowlter ........................................................... 12-3
RX Treble ............................................................................. 12-3
TBW (MID) ........................................................................... 12-3
TBW (NAR) .......................................................................... 12-3
TBW (WIDE) ......................................................................... 12-3
TX Bass ................................................................................ 12-3
TX Treble .............................................................................. 12-3
SWR, Multi-function meter ......................................................... 3-11
SWR measurement
Plot ....................................................................................... 13-3
Spot ...................................................................................... 13-2
T
Time-Out Timer (CI-V) ............................................................... 12-5
Time (Set mode) ...................................................................... 12-11
Time Set (Set mode) ............................................................... 12-11
Time Stamp
Frequency (RTTY decode log) ............................................. 4-27
RTTY decode log .................................................................. 4-27
Time (RTTY decode log) ...................................................... 4-27
Tone scan operation .................................................................. 10-7
Tone squelch operation ............................................................. 4-30
Touch screen .......................................................................... iii, 1-5
Touch Screen Calibration ........................................................ 12-11
Function ................................................................................ 14-3
Maintenance .............................................................................. iii
Operation (Spectum scope) ................................................... 5-4
Precautions ............................................................................... iii
Transmitting, basic .................................................................... 3-10
Transmitlterwidth,setting ....................................................... 4-14
Transmit output power, adjusting ............................................... 3-10
Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 14-5
Tuner
Connecting ...............................................................................2-4
External ..................................................................................11-3
Internal .................................................................................. 11-2
Preset Memory Clear ........................................................... 12-5
PTT Start .............................................................................. 12-5
PTT Tuner start ..................................................................... 11-2
[TUNER] Switch ...........................................................................12-5
Tuning
1/4 ..........................................................................................3-5
CW Auto ............................................................................... 4-16
Manual .................................................................................. 11-2
PTT Tuner start.......................................................................11-2
Tuning Step
Auto ......................................................................................... 3-5
Changing ................................................................................ 3-4
Function .................................................................................. 3-4
Twin PBT
IFlterwidthdisplay ........................................................... 12-10
PBT shift value ................................................................... 12-10
Using ......................................................................... 4-5
Twin Peak Filter ......................................................................... 4-22
TX Delay
TX USOS ................................................................................... 4-28
U
Unmount (SD Card) ..................................................................... 8-3
Updatingthermware ............................................................... 15-5
USB
Baud Rate (CI-V) .................................................................. 12-9
Echo Back (CI-V) ................................................................... 12-9
Keying (CW) ......................................................................... 12-9
Keying (RTTY) ...................................................................... 12-9
MOD Level ........................................................................... 12-7
SEND ................................................................................... 12-9
Serial Function ..................................................................... 12-9
USB→REMOTETransceiveAddress ................................... 12-8
USB AF Beep/Speech... Output .............................................12-7
USB AF Output Level .............................................................12-7
USB AF SQL ...........................................................................12-7
USB IF Output Level ..............................................................12-7
USB Output Select ...............................................................12-7
USB Port .............................................................................. 12-8
UTC Offset ............................................................................... 12-11
V
VBW (Video Band Width) ............................................................ 5-6
VFO
Mode ...................................................................................... 3-2
Selecting ................................................................................. 3-2
Using ...................................................................................... 3-2
VFO A and VFO B
Equalizing ............................................................................... 3-2
Receive and transmit frequencies ........................................ 4-13
Selecting ................................................................................. 3-2
VFO and Memory modes ............................................................ 3-2
VOICE DELAY ........................................................................... 4-10
Voice memory contents
Name, entering ....................................................................... 7-3
Repeatedly transmitting .......................................................... 7-4
Transmitting ............................................................................ 7-4
VOICE PLAYER screen ............................................................... 6-4
INDEX
I-5
Voice recorder
Deletingale ........................................................................... 6-5
Deleting a folder ...................................................................... 6-6
File information, checking ....................................................... 6-4
File Split function ..................................................................... 6-8
Folder information, checking .................................................. 6-5
Voice TX memory
Output level ............................................................................ 7-5
Recording ............................................................................... 7-2
Repeat Time ........................................................................... 7-6
VOICE TX SET screen ................................................................ 7-6
Volume level, adjusting ................................................................ 3-2
VOX
Adjusting ............................................................................... 4-10
ANTI ..................................................................................... 4-10
Function ................................................................................ 4-10
Gain ...................................................................................... 4-10
Turning ON ........................................................................... 4-10
W
Waterfall (Spectrum Scope)
Display .................................................................................... 5-7
Marker Auto-hide .................................................................... 5-7
Peak Color Level .................................................................... 5-7
Size (Expand Screen) ............................................................ 5-7
Speed ..................................................................................... 5-7
Waveform (Spectrum Scope)
Color (Current) ....................................................................... 5-7
Color (Line) ............................................................................. 5-7
Color (Max Hold) .................................................................... 5-7
Type ........................................................................................ 5-6
WIDTH (Noise Blanker) ............................................................... 4-8
ABOUT CE
INSTALLATION NOTES
For amateur base station installations it is recommended
that the forward clearance in front of the antenna array is
calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective Isotropic Radiated
Power). The clearance height below the antenna array can
be determined in most cases from the RF power at the
antenna input terminals.
As different exposure limits have been recommended for
different frequencies, a relative table shows a guideline for
installation considerations.
Below30MHz,therecommendedlimitsarespeciedin
termsofV/morA/meldsastheyarelikelytofallwithinthe
near-eldregion.Similarly,theantennasmaybephysically
short in terms of electrical length and that the installation will
require some antenna matching device which can create
local,highintensitymagneticelds.AnalysisofsuchMF
installations is best considered in association with published
guidance notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition
97-01 and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter
installations. The EC recommended limits are almost
identicaltotheFCCspecied‘uncontrolled’limitsandtables
exist that show pre-calculated safe distances for different
antenna types for different frequency bands. Further
information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.
• Typical amateur radio installation
Exposure distance assumes that the predominant radiation
pattern is forward and that radiation vertically downwards
is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is equal to main lobe
gain). This is true of almost every gain antenna today.
Exposed persons are assumed to be beneath the antenna
array and have a typical height of 1.8 m.
Theguresassumetheworstcaseemissionofaconstant
carrier.
For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power
density limits have been recommended:
10–50 MHz 2 W/sq m
Vertical clearance by EIRP output
1 Watts 2.1 m
10 Watts 2.8 m
25 Watts 3.4 m
100 Watts 5 m
1000 Watts 12 m
Forward clearance by EIRP output
100 Watts 2 m
1000 Watts 6.5 m
10,000 Watts 20 m
100,000 Watts 65 m
In all cases any possible risk depends on the transmitter
being activated for long periods. (actual recommendation
limitsarespeciedasanaverageduring6minutes)
Normally the transmitter is not active for long periods of
time. Some radio licenses will require that a timer circuit
automatically cuts the transmitter after 1–2 minutes etc.
Similarly some types of emission, i.e., SSB, CW, AM etc.
havealower‘average’outputpowerandtheassessedrisk
is even lower.
• List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1)
Country Codes Country Codes
1 Austria AT 18 Liechtenstein LI
2 Belgium BE 19 Lithuania LT
3 Bulgaria BG 20 Luxembourg LU
4 Croatia HR 21 Malta MT
5 Czech Republic CZ 22 Netherlands NL
6 Cyprus CY 23 Norway NO
7 Denmark DK 24 Poland PL
8 Estonia EE 25 Portugal PT
9 Finland FI 26 Romania RO
10 France FR 27 Slovakia SK
11 Germany DE 28 Slovenia SI
12 Greece GR 29 Spain ES
13 Hungary HU 30 Sweden SE
14 Iceland IS 31 Switzerland CH
15 Ireland IE 32 Turkey TR
16 Italy IT 33 United Kingdom GB
17 Latvia LV
1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan
A-7292-4EX
© 2016 Icom Inc.
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
IC-7300 #03
(Europe)
IC-7300 #05
(Italy)
IC-7300 #06
(Spain)
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Icom-IC-7300

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Icom IC-7300 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Icom IC-7300 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 24,44 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info